Fix more GDB build breakage on mingw32
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
2571583a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
144@ifset M68HC11
145* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
147@ifset HPPA
148* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
833794fc
MR
153@ifset MIPS
154* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
156@ifset POWERPC
157* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
159@ifset POWERPC64
160* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
162@ifset S/390
163* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
165@ifset SPU
166* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
168@ifset TICOFF
169* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
171@ifset WIN32
172* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
174@ifset XTENSA
175* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176@end ifset
252b5132
RH
177@end ifclear
178@ifclear SingleFormat
179* BFD:: BFD
180@end ifclear
181@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 185* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 186* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 187@end menu
84ec0e6d 188@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
189
190@node Overview
191@chapter Overview
192
193@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 195
0879a67a 196@ifset man
0285c67d 197@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 198ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
199@c man end
200
201@c man begin SEEALSO
202ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204@file{ld}.
205@c man end
206@end ifset
207
208@c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 211their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 212compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 213
ff5dcc92 214@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
215a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
0285c67d
NC
218@ifset man
219@c For the man only
ece2d90e 220This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
221@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
223@end ifset
224
252b5132 225@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
226This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
228write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231@end ifclear
232
233Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 236@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
237(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man end
240
252b5132
RH
241@node Invocation
242@chapter Invocation
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
ff5dcc92 246The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
247and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
0285c67d
NC
250@c man end
251
252b5132
RH
252@ifset UsesEnvVars
253@menu
254* Options:: Command Line Options
255* Environment:: Environment Variables
256@end menu
257
258@node Options
259@section Command Line Options
260@end ifset
261
262@cindex command line
263@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
264
265@c man begin OPTIONS
266
252b5132
RH
267The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 270For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
271object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274@smallexample
275ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276@end smallexample
277
ff5dcc92 278This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
279result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
ff5dcc92 283Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
284point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
289occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291noted in the descriptions below.
292
293@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
294Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
298
299Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303message @samp{No input files}.
304
36f63dca 305If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
306assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
311@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
316
317For options whose names are a single letter,
318option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320option that requires them.
321
322For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 323precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 324@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 325this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 326only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
327@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329output.
330
331Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336accepted.
252b5132 337
36f63dca
NC
338Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
340prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
342
343@smallexample
2509a395 344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
345@end smallexample
346
347This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
348silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355@smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
358
359Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360linker:
361
ff5dcc92 362@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 363@include at-file.texi
dff70155 364
2509a395
SL
365@kindex -a @var{keyword}
366@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
367This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
7ee314fa
AM
373@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 380it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 381This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 382interface.
7ee314fa 383
252b5132
RH
384@ifset I960
385@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
386@kindex -A @var{arch}
387@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
388@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
390In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
392@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 394archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
395family}, for details.
396
ff5dcc92 397Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
398other architecture families.
399@end ifset
400
401@ifclear SingleFormat
402@cindex binary input format
403@kindex -b @var{format}
404@kindex --format=@var{format}
405@cindex input format
406@cindex input format
407@item -b @var{input-format}
408@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
409@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 411@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 412that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 413configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 414to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
415default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419@xref{BFD}.
420
421You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423linking object files of different formats), by including
424@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 425particular format.
252b5132
RH
426
427The default format is taken from the environment variable
428@code{GNUTARGET}.
429@ifset UsesEnvVars
430@xref{Environment}.
431@end ifset
432You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
433@code{TARGET};
434@ifclear man
435see @ref{Format Commands}.
436@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
437@end ifclear
438
439@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441@cindex compatibility, MRI
442@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 444For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 445files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
446@ifclear man
447@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448@end ifclear
449@ifset man
450the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451@end ifset
452Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 453the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
454scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
456specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458@cindex common allocation
459@kindex -d
460@kindex -dc
461@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 462@item -d
252b5132
RH
463@itemx -dc
464@itemx -dp
465These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
7ee314fa
AM
471@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 480The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 481
252b5132
RH
482@cindex entry point, from command line
483@kindex -e @var{entry}
484@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 485@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
486@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
b58f81ae
DJ
495@kindex --exclude-libs
496@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 498exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
499@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504be treated as hidden.
505
e1c37eb5
DK
506@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517regardless of this option.
518
252b5132
RH
519@cindex dynamic symbol table
520@kindex -E
521@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 522@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
523@item -E
524@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
525@itemx --no-export-dynamic
526When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
535
536If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539linking the program itself.
540
55255dae 541You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 542be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 543See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 544
8b747e1a
DK
545Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
36f63dca 549@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
550@cindex big-endian objects
551@cindex endianness
552@kindex -EB
553@item -EB
554Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556@cindex little-endian objects
557@kindex -EL
558@item -EL
559Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 560@end ifclear
252b5132 561
2509a395
SL
562@kindex -f @var{name}
563@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564@item -f @var{name}
565@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
566When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579machine specific performance.
580
581This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -F @var{name}
585@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 586@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 587@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599@var{name}.
600
ff5dcc92 601Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 602toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
603object files.
604@ifclear SingleFormat
605The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 606@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 607@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
608environment variable.
609@end ifclear
610The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 612
3dbf70a2 613@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
614@kindex -fini=@var{name}
615@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
616When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619the function to call.
620
252b5132
RH
621@kindex -g
622@item -g
623Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
2509a395
SL
625@kindex -G @var{value}
626@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 627@cindex object size
2509a395 628@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
629@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 632MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
633sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 636@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 637@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 638@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
639@itemx -soname=@var{name}
640When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646@kindex -i
647@cindex incremental link
648@item -i
649Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
3dbf70a2 651@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
652@kindex -init=@var{name}
653@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
654When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657function to call.
658
252b5132 659@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 660@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 661@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 662@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
663@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 667will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 668will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 669
ff5dcc92 670On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
671files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
678
679The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
ff5dcc92 686See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
687archives multiple times.
688
689You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691@ifset GENERIC
692This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 693if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
694behaviour of the AIX linker.
695@end ifset
696
697@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 698@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 699@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 700@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 701@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
702Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
704option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 707@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
708order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710option is specified.
252b5132 711
3aa2d05a
NC
712If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 715
252b5132
RH
716@ifset UsesEnvVars
717The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 718@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
719some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720@end ifset
721
722The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726@cindex emulation
727@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 728@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
729Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736configured.
737
738@cindex link map
739@kindex -M
740@kindex --print-map
741@item -M
742@itemx --print-map
743Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744information about the link, including the following:
745
746@itemize @bullet
747@item
3b83e13a 748Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
749@item
750How common symbols are allocated.
751@item
752All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
754@item
755The values assigned to symbols.
756
757Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763linker script containing:
764
765@smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769@end smallexample
770
771will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772option is used:
773
774@smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778@end smallexample
779
780See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781scripts.
252b5132
RH
782@end itemize
783
784@kindex -n
785@cindex read-only text
786@cindex NMAGIC
787@kindex --nmagic
788@item -n
789@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
790Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -N
795@kindex --omagic
796@cindex read/write from cmd line
797@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 798@item -N
252b5132
RH
799@itemx --omagic
800Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
801not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
803mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
806
807@kindex --no-omagic
808@cindex OMAGIC
809@item --no-omagic
810This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
814
815@kindex -o @var{output}
816@kindex --output=@var{output}
817@cindex naming the output file
818@item -o @var{output}
819@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 820Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
821option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824@kindex -O @var{level}
825@cindex generating optimized output
826@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 827If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 828the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
829should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 834
387dd777
DP
835@kindex -plugin @var{name}
836@item -plugin @var{name}
837Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841wish.
842
843Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849just copy in the newest one.
850
26278bb8
UD
851@kindex --push-state
852@cindex push state governing input file handling
853@item --push-state
854The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868something as follows:
869
870@smallexample
871-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872@end smallexample
873
874@kindex --pop-state
875@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 876@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
877Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878flags governing input file handling.
879
a712da20
NC
880@kindex -q
881@kindex --emit-relocs
882@cindex retain relocations in final executable
883@item -q
884@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 885Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
886Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888in larger executables.
889
dbab7a7b
NC
890This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
4f471f39
RS
892@kindex --force-dynamic
893@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894@item --force-dynamic
895Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896to VxWorks targets.
897
252b5132
RH
898@cindex partial link
899@cindex relocatable output
900@kindex -r
1049f94e 901@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 902@item -r
1049f94e 903@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 904Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 905turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
906linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 909@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
910If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
62bf86b4
HPN
914When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918with input files in other formats at all.
919
252b5132
RH
920This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922@kindex -R @var{file}
923@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924@cindex symbol-only input
925@item -R @var{filename}
926@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
ff5dcc92 932For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 933followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 934the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -s
937@kindex --strip-all
938@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 939@item -s
252b5132
RH
940@itemx --strip-all
941Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943@kindex -S
944@kindex --strip-debug
945@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 946@item -S
252b5132
RH
947@itemx --strip-debug
948Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
a70f34c0
NC
950@kindex --strip-discarded
951@kindex --no-strip-discarded
952@item --strip-discarded
953@itemx --no-strip-discarded
954Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955Enabled by default.
956
252b5132
RH
957@kindex -t
958@kindex --trace
959@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 960@item -t
252b5132 961@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 962Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
963
964@kindex -T @var{script}
965@kindex --script=@var{script}
966@cindex script files
967@item -T @var{scriptfile}
968@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 970@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 971@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
972output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975options accumulate.
252b5132 976
14be8564
L
977@kindex -dT @var{script}
978@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979@cindex script files
980@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991@samp{gcc}).
992
252b5132
RH
993@kindex -u @var{symbol}
994@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995@cindex undefined symbol
996@item -u @var{symbol}
997@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
0a618243
AB
1004If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007instead.
1008
1009@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex symbols, require defined
1011@cindex defined symbol
1012@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
252b5132
RH
1020@kindex -Ur
1021@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1022@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1023For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1025turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1026@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030@samp{-r} for the others.
1031
c005eb9e
AB
1032@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033@cindex orphan sections
1034@cindex sections, orphan
1035@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041@table @code
1042@item place
1043Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1045@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1046
1047@item discard
1048All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051@item warn
1052The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053issue a warning.
1054
1055@item error
1056The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057@end table
1058
1059The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
577a0623
AM
1061@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1070
252b5132
RH
1071@kindex -v
1072@kindex -V
1073@kindex --version
1074@cindex version
1075@item -v
1076@itemx --version
1077@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1078Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1079lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081@kindex -x
1082@kindex --discard-all
1083@cindex deleting local symbols
1084@item -x
1085@itemx --discard-all
1086Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088@kindex -X
1089@kindex --discard-locals
1090@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1091@item -X
252b5132 1092@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1093Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1096
1097@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099@cindex symbol tracing
1100@item -y @var{symbol}
1101@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109@kindex -Y @var{path}
1110@item -Y @var{path}
1111Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1116The recognized keywords are:
1117@table @samp
1118
1119@item combreloc
1120Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1121lookup caching possible.
1122
b8871f35
L
1123@item common
1124Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1125link.
1126
cd6d6c15 1127@item defs
560e09e9 1128Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1129shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1130
6aa29e7b
JJ
1131@item execstack
1132Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1133
b039ef04
L
1134@item global
1135This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1136the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1137of subsequently loaded libraries.
1138
93ab9c0d
NC
1139@item globalaudit
1140This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1141This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1142setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1143tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1144the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1145all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1146
cd6d6c15
NC
1147@item initfirst
1148This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1149It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1150before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1151the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1152the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1153objects.
1154
1155@item interpose
1156Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1157but the primary executable.
1158
5fa222e4
AM
1159@item lazy
1160When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1161dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1162the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1163Lazy binding is the default.
1164
cd6d6c15
NC
1165@item loadfltr
1166Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1167runtime.
1168
1169@item muldefs
1170Allows multiple definitions.
1171
1172@item nocombreloc
1173Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1174
b8871f35
L
1175@item nocommon
1176Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1177link.
1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1180Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1181defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1182
1183@item nodefaultlib
1184Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1185ignore any default library search paths.
1186
1187@item nodelete
1188Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1189
1190@item nodlopen
1191Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1192
1193@item nodump
1194Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item noexecstack
1197Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1198
8dfef1bd
L
1199@item text
1200Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1201
1202@item notext
1203Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1204
1205@item textoff
1206Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1207
6aa29e7b
JJ
1208@item norelro
1209Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1210
cd6d6c15
NC
1211@item now
1212When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1213dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1214when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1215deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1216first called.
1217
1218@item origin
1219Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1220
6aa29e7b 1221@item relro
def5c83c
AM
1222Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1223specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1224relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1225than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
6aa29e7b 1226
24718e3b
L
1227@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1228Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1229
1230@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1231Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1232
04c3a755
NS
1233@item stack-size=@var{value}
1234Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1235Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1236@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1237
d258b828
IZ
1238@item bndplt
1239Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1240
889c2a67
L
1241@item noextern-protected-data
1242Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1243library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1244to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1245generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1246module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1247i386 and x86-64.
1248
954b63d4
AM
1249@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1250Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1251if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1252by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1253option.
1254
aec6b87e 1255@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1256Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1257object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1258@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1259are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1260make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1261
4c10bbaa
L
1262@item noreloc-overflow
1263Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1264relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1265overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1266
caa65211 1267@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1268@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1269@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1270@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1271Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1272to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1273@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1274@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1275@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1276@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1277Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1278
ee2fdd6f
L
1279@item ibtplt
1280Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1281Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1282
1283@item IBT
1284Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1285to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1286Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1287
48580982
L
1288@item shstk
1289Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1290to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1291Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1292
cd6d6c15
NC
1293@end table
1294
ece2d90e 1295Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1296
1297@kindex -(
1298@cindex groups of archives
1299@item -( @var{archives} -)
1300@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1301The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1302either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1303
1304The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1305references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1306the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1307archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1308object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1309would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1310they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1311resolved.
1312
1313Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1314it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1315more archives.
1316
69da35b5
NC
1317@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1318@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1319@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1320@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1321Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1322recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1323and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1324the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1325behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1326so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1327restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1328
4a43e768
AM
1329@kindex --as-needed
1330@kindex --no-as-needed
1331@item --as-needed
1332@itemx --no-as-needed
1333This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1334on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1335the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1336on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1337needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1338emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1339non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1340the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1341non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1342Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1343the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1344needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1345from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1346
e56f61be
L
1347@kindex --add-needed
1348@kindex --no-add-needed
1349@item --add-needed
1350@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1351These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1352their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1353options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1354and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1357@item -assert @var{keyword}
1358This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1359
1360@kindex -Bdynamic
1361@kindex -dy
1362@kindex -call_shared
1363@item -Bdynamic
1364@itemx -dy
1365@itemx -call_shared
1366Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1367for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1368default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1369for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1370multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1371@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1372
a1ab1d2a
UD
1373@kindex -Bgroup
1374@item -Bgroup
1375Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1376section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1377object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1378@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1379only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1380
252b5132
RH
1381@kindex -Bstatic
1382@kindex -dn
1383@kindex -non_shared
1384@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1385@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1386@itemx -dn
1387@itemx -non_shared
1388@itemx -static
1389Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1390platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1391variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1392may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1393library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1394option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1395option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1396shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1397references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1398libraries.
252b5132
RH
1399
1400@kindex -Bsymbolic
1401@item -Bsymbolic
1402When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1403definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1404for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1405within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1406@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1407executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1408the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1409support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1410
40b36307
L
1411@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1412@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1413When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1414symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1415This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1416when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1417to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1418This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1419libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1420
55255dae
L
1421@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1422@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1423Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1424typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1425global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1426within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1427to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1428in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1429which support shared libraries.
1430
1431The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1432scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1433
40b36307
L
1434@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1435@item --dynamic-list-data
1436Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1437
1438@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1439@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1440Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1441is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1442
0b8a70d9
L
1443@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1444@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1445Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1446
252b5132
RH
1447@kindex --check-sections
1448@kindex --no-check-sections
1449@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1450@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1451Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1452been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1453perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1454suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1455allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1456restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1457Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1458force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1459option.
252b5132 1460
ddbb8a31
NC
1461@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1462@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1463@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1464@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1465This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1466by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1467command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1468output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1469input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1470specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1471follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1472behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1473
1474This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1475libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1476mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1477their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1478required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1479the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1480dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1481symbols.
1482
252b5132
RH
1483@cindex cross reference table
1484@kindex --cref
1485@item --cref
1486Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1487generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1488Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1489
1490The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1491easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1492sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1493symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1494definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1495where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1496symbol are listed.
252b5132 1497
4818e05f
AM
1498@cindex common allocation
1499@kindex --no-define-common
1500@item --no-define-common
1501This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1502The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1503@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1504
1505The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1506the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1507of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1508forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1509Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1510from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1511This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1512and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1513duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1514paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1515
7bdf4127
AB
1516@cindex group allocation in linker script
1517@cindex section groups
1518@cindex COMDAT
1519@kindex --force-group-allocation
1520@item --force-group-allocation
1521This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1522normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1523default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1524change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1525command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1526effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1527
252b5132 1528@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1530@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1531Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1532address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1533times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1534limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1535context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1536symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1537constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1538using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1539@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1540equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1541
1542@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1543@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1544@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1545@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1546@itemx --no-demangle
1547These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1548and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1549present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1550underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1551mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1552different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1553to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1554demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1555is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1556
1557@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1558@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1559@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1560@item -I@var{file}
1561@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1562Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1563generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1564linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1565doing.
1566
9b8b325a
RF
1567@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1568@item --no-dynamic-linker
1569When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1570linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1571executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1572entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1573
a70f34c0
NC
1574@kindex --embedded-relocs
1575@item --embedded-relocs
1576This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1577that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1578is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1579targets.
1580
7ce691ae 1581@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1582@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1583@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1584@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1585Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1586with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1587
252b5132
RH
1588@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1589@item --force-exe-suffix
1590Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1591
1592If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1593@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1594the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1595option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1596Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1597it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1598
1599@kindex --gc-sections
1600@kindex --no-gc-sections
1601@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1602@item --gc-sections
1603@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1604Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1605targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1606performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1607@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1608collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1609implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1610
d5465ba2
AM
1611@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1612examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1613symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1614command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1615referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1616libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1617referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1618the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1619relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1620
ac69cbc6 1621This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1622@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1623specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1624a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1625
c17d87de
NC
1626@kindex --print-gc-sections
1627@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1628@cindex garbage collection
1629@item --print-gc-sections
1630@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1631List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1632printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1633collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1634default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1635be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1636line.
1637
22185505 1638@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1639@cindex garbage collection
1640@item --gc-keep-exported
1641When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1642collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1643default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1644executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1645collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1646Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1647it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1648ELF format targets.
1649
30824704
RM
1650@kindex --print-output-format
1651@cindex output format
1652@item --print-output-format
1653Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1654other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1655in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1656
3604cb1f
TG
1657@kindex --print-memory-usage
1658@cindex memory usage
1659@item --print-memory-usage
1660Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1661the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1662quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1663headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1664parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1665
1666@smallexample
1667Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1668 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1669 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1670@end smallexample
1671
252b5132
RH
1672@cindex help
1673@cindex usage
1674@kindex --help
1675@item --help
1676Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1677
ea20a7da
CC
1678@kindex --target-help
1679@item --target-help
1680Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1681
2509a395
SL
1682@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1683@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1684Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1685@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1686
1687@cindex memory usage
1688@kindex --no-keep-memory
1689@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1690@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1691symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1692instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1693necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1694while linking a large executable.
1695
1696@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1697@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1698@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1699@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1700Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1701is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1702The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1703behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1704libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1705
aa713662
L
1706@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1707@kindex -z muldefs
1708@item --allow-multiple-definition
1709@itemx -z muldefs
1710Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1711report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1712first definition will be used.
1713
b79e8c78 1714@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1715@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1716@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1717@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1718Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1719This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1720determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1721shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1722how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1723
903249d7
NC
1724The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1725referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1726an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1727a shared library.
1728
1729The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1730libraries specified at link time are that:
1731
1732@itemize @bullet
1733@item
1734A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1735that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1736resolvable at load time.
1737@item
1738There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1739symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1740
1741The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1742select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1743architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1744appropriate memset function.
1745@end itemize
b79e8c78 1746
31941635
L
1747@kindex --no-undefined-version
1748@item --no-undefined-version
1749Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1750it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1751will be issued instead.
1752
3e3b46e5
PB
1753@kindex --default-symver
1754@item --default-symver
1755Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1756exported symbols.
1757
1758@kindex --default-imported-symver
1759@item --default-imported-symver
1760Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1761imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1762
252b5132
RH
1763@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1764@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1765Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1766files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1767been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1768This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1769errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1770have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1771inappropriate.
1772
fe7929ce
AM
1773@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1774@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1775Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1776library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1777
252b5132
RH
1778@kindex --no-whole-archive
1779@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1780Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1781archive files.
1782
1783@cindex output file after errors
1784@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1785@item --noinhibit-exec
1786Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1787Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1788errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1789when it issues any error whatsoever.
1790
0a9c1c8e
CD
1791@kindex -nostdlib
1792@item -nostdlib
1793Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1794command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1795(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1796
252b5132 1797@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1798@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1799@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1800@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1801file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1802@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1803object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1804object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1805should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1806usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1807name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1808list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1809command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1810this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1811@end ifclear
1812
76359541
TP
1813@kindex --out-implib
1814@item --out-implib @var{file}
1815Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1816the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1817library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1818may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1819behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1820step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1821the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1822
36af4a4e
JJ
1823@kindex -pie
1824@kindex --pic-executable
1825@item -pie
1826@itemx --pic-executable
1827@cindex position independent executables
1828Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1829ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1830libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1831address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1832normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1833defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1834
252b5132
RH
1835@kindex -qmagic
1836@item -qmagic
1837This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1838
1839@kindex -Qy
1840@item -Qy
1841This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1842
1843@kindex --relax
1844@cindex synthesizing linker
1845@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1846@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1847@item --relax
28d5f677 1848@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1849An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1850@ifset GENERIC
1851This option is only supported on a few targets.
1852@end ifset
1853@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1854@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1855@end ifset
1856@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1857@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1858@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1859@ifset XTENSA
1860@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1861@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1862@ifset M68HC11
1863@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1864@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1865@ifset NIOSII
1866@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1867@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1868@ifset POWERPC
1869@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1870@end ifset
252b5132 1871
28d5f677
NC
1872On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1873global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1874addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1875synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1876instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1877
1878On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1879debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1880@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1881This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1882family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1883@end ifset
1884
1885@ifset GENERIC
1886On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1887but ignored.
1888@end ifset
1889
28d5f677
NC
1890On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1891@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1892
252b5132
RH
1893@cindex retaining specified symbols
1894@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1895@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1896@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1897@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1898Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1899discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1900symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1901@ifset GENERIC
1902(such as VxWorks)
1903@end ifset
1904where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1905run-time memory.
1906
1907@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1908or symbols needed for relocations.
1909
1910You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1911line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1912
1913@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1914@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1915@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1916@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1917Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1918linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1919arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1920them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1921also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1922objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1923@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1924ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1925@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1926
ff5dcc92 1927The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1928SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1929@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1930runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1931options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1932gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1933file systems.
252b5132 1934
ff5dcc92 1935For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1936followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1937the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1938@end ifset
1939
1940@ifset GENERIC
1941@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1942@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1943@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1944When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1945happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1946of the input files.
1947
1948When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1949non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1950shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1951explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1952specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1953@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1954either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1955appearing multiple times.
1956
e680a6b6
NC
1957The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1958directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1959containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1960and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
196164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1962
1963The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1964@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1965supported.
1966
28c309a2
NC
1967This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1968that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1969is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1970runtime linker would do.
1971
252b5132 1972The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1973libraries:
252b5132
RH
1974@enumerate
1975@item
ff5dcc92 1976Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1977@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1978Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1979between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1980specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1981used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1982at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1983by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1984the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1985@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1986On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1987@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1988environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1989@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1990On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1991directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1992@item
a1b8d843 1993For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1994variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1995@item
ec4eb78a
L
1996For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1997@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1998libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1999@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2000@item
252b5132
RH
2001The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2002@item
2003For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2004exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2005@end enumerate
2006
2007If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2008warning and continue with the link.
2009@end ifset
2010
2011@kindex -shared
2012@kindex -Bshareable
2013@item -shared
2014@itemx -Bshareable
2015@cindex shared libraries
2016Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2017and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2018shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2019undefined symbols in the link.
2020
252b5132 2021@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2022@item --sort-common
2023@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2024@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2025This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2026ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2027sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2028eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2029between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2030specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2031
2509a395
SL
2032@kindex --sort-section=name
2033@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2034This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2035patterns in the linker script.
2036
2509a395
SL
2037@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2038@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2039This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2040patterns in the linker script.
2041
a70f34c0
NC
2042@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2043@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2044This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2045.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2046post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2047
252b5132 2048@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2049@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2050Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2051each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2052size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2053
2054@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2055@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2056Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2057output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2058This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2059certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2060cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2061that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2062support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2063input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2064more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2065many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2066
2067@kindex --stats
2068@item --stats
2069Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2070as execution time and memory usage.
2071
2509a395 2072@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2073@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2074Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2075configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2076that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2077
a70f34c0
NC
2078@kindex --task-link
2079@item --task-link
2080This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2081file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2082
252b5132
RH
2083@kindex --traditional-format
2084@cindex traditional format
2085@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2086For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2087the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2088use the traditional format instead.
2089
2090@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2091For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2092symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2093full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2094@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2095trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2096combine duplicate entries.
2097
2509a395
SL
2098@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2099@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2100Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2101address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2102times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2103line.
2104@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2105for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2106@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2107should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2108sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2109
2509a395
SL
2110@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2111@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2112@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2113@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2114@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2115@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2116@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2117Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2118@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2119
2509a395
SL
2120@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2121@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2122@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2123When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2124byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2125
9d5777a3
RM
2126@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2127@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2128@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2129When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2130the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2131text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2132
0d705e9f
AM
2133@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2134@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2135@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2136When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2137model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2138
560e09e9
NC
2139@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2140@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2141Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2142values for @samp{method}:
2143
2144@table @samp
2145@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2146Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2147
2148@item report-all
da8bce14 2149Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2150
2151@item ignore-in-object-files
2152Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2153ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2154
2155@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2156Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2157ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2158when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2159libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2160command line.
2161@end table
2162
2163The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2164by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2165
2166Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2167unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2168can change this to a warning.
2169
1715a13c
L
2170@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2171@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2172@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2173@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2174Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2175supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2176the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2177argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2178
2179@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2180@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2181@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2182Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2183used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2184about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2185is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2186see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2187use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2188symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2189@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2190
7ce691ae 2191@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2192@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2193@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2194@item --warn-common
2195Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2196a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2197but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2198you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2199Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2200warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2201
2202There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2203
2204@table @samp
2205@item int i = 1;
2206A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2207file.
2208
2209@item extern int i;
2210An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2211There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2212variable somewhere.
2213
2214@item int i;
2215A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2216variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2217The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2218single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2219size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2220a definition of the same variable.
2221@end table
2222
2223The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2224Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2225just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2226encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2227a common symbol.
2228
2229@enumerate
2230@item
2231Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2232definition for the symbol.
2233@smallexample
2234@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2235 overridden by definition
2236@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2237@end smallexample
2238
2239@item
2240Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2241the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2242except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2243@smallexample
2244@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2245 overriding common
2246@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2247@end smallexample
2248
2249@item
2250Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2251@smallexample
2252@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2253 of `@var{symbol}'
2254@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2255@end smallexample
2256
2257@item
2258Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2259@smallexample
2260@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2261 overridden by larger common
2262@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2263@end smallexample
2264
2265@item
2266Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2267the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2268encountered in a different order.
2269@smallexample
2270@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2271 overriding smaller common
2272@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2273@end smallexample
2274@end enumerate
2275
2276@kindex --warn-constructors
2277@item --warn-constructors
2278Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2279object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2280detect the use of global constructors.
2281
2282@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2283@item --warn-multiple-gp
2284Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2285This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2286Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2287section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2288of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2289base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2290base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2291bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2292large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2293values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2294option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2295
2296@kindex --warn-once
2297@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2298@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2299@item --warn-once
2300Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2301which refers to it.
2302
2303@kindex --warn-section-align
2304@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2305@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2306@item --warn-section-align
2307Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2308alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2309The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2310is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2311the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2312
8fdd7217
NC
2313@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2314@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2315Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2316
a0c402a5
L
2317@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2318@item --warn-alternate-em
2319Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2320
560e09e9
NC
2321@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2322@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2323If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2324@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2325This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2326
2327@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2328@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2329This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2330it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2331
252b5132
RH
2332@kindex --whole-archive
2333@cindex including an entire archive
2334@item --whole-archive
2335For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2336@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2337in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2338files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2339library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2340library. This option may be used more than once.
2341
7ec229ce 2342Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2343about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2344Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2345list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2346your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2347
2509a395
SL
2348@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2349@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2350Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2351@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2352undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2353@var{symbol}.
2354
2355This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2356wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2357wishes to call the system function, it should call
2358@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2359
2360Here is a trivial example:
2361
2362@smallexample
2363void *
cc2f008e 2364__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2365@{
cc2f008e 2366 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2367 return __real_malloc (c);
2368@}
2369@end smallexample
2370
ff5dcc92 2371If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2372all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2373instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2374call the real @code{malloc} function.
2375
2376You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2377links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2378you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2379file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2380call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2381
6aa29e7b 2382@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2383@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2384@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2385@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2386Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2387(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2388section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2389
e41b3a13
JJ
2390@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2391@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2392Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2393generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2394if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2395
6c1439be
L
2396@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2397@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2398@item --enable-new-dtags
2399@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2400This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2401systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2402@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2403and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2404If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2405created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2406those options are only available for ELF systems.
2407
2d643429 2408@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2409@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2410Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2411close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2412time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2413increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2414value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2415
fdc90cb4
JJ
2416@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2417@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2418Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2419@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2420new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2421the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2422hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2423
0ce398f1
L
2424@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2425@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2426@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2427@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2428@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2429@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2430@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2431@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2432On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2433compressed using zlib.
2434
2435@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2436sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2437DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2438instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2439also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2440sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2441
2442The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2443@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2444
2445Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2446sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2447for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2448uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2449
2450The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2451involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2452default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2453@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2454
35835446
JR
2455@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2456@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2457This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2458linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2459for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2460about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2461
4f9c04f7 2462Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24631021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2464run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2465has been used.
2466
2467The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2468enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2469
c0065db7
RM
2470@kindex --build-id
2471@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2472@item --build-id
2473@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2474Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2475or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2476unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2477@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2478@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2479@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2480the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2481string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2482@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2483is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2484
2485The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2486that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2487unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2488to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2489file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2490string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2491
2492Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2493@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2494@end table
2495
0285c67d
NC
2496@c man end
2497
36f63dca 2498@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2499
0285c67d
NC
2500@c man begin OPTIONS
2501
ff5dcc92 2502The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2503the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2504normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2505use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2506@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2507like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2508symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2509object file).
2510
2511In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2512support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2513PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2514values by either a space or an equals sign.
2515
ff5dcc92 2516@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2517
2518@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2519@item --add-stdcall-alias
2520If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2521as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2523
2524@kindex --base-file
2525@item --base-file @var{file}
2526Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2527addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2528@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2529[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@kindex --dll
2532@item --dll
2533Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2534@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2535file.
bb10df36 2536[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2537
88183869
DK
2538@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2539@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2540@item --enable-long-section-names
2541@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2542The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2543the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2544for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2545fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2546to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2547allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2548disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2549generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2550as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2551with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2552GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2553information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2554option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2555section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2556when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2557image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2558[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2559
252b5132
RH
2560@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2561@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2562@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2563@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2564If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2565do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2566only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2567resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2568undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2569@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2570to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2571warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2572import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2573to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2574feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2575@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2576mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2577[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2578
522f09cd
KT
2579@kindex --leading-underscore
2580@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2581@item --leading-underscore
2582@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2583For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2584in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2585disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2586
252b5132
RH
2587@cindex DLLs, creating
2588@kindex --export-all-symbols
2589@item --export-all-symbols
2590If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2591be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2592otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2593explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2594attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2595option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2596@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2597@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2598exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2599re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2600such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2601@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2602@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2603Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2604not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2605extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2606(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2607These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2608@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2609@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2610@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2611@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2613
2614@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2615@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2616Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2617exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2618[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2619
2927aaca
NC
2620@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2621@item --exclude-all-symbols
2622Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2623[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2624
252b5132
RH
2625@kindex --file-alignment
2626@item --file-alignment
2627Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2628file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2629512.
bb10df36 2630[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2631
2632@cindex heap size
2633@kindex --heap
2634@item --heap @var{reserve}
2635@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2636Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2637to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2638committed.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2640
2641@cindex image base
2642@kindex --image-base
2643@item --image-base @var{value}
2644Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2645the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2646is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2647your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2648other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2649for dlls.
bb10df36 2650[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2651
2652@kindex --kill-at
2653@item --kill-at
2654If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2655symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2656[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2657
26d2d8a2
BF
2658@kindex --large-address-aware
2659@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2660If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2661header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2662greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2663or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2664section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2665[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2666
f69a2f97
NC
2667@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2668@item --disable-large-address-aware
2669Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2670This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2671driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2672addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2673[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2674
252b5132
RH
2675@kindex --major-image-version
2676@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2677Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2679
2680@kindex --major-os-version
2681@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2682Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2686@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2687Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2688[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2689
2690@kindex --minor-image-version
2691@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2692Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2693[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2694
2695@kindex --minor-os-version
2696@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2697Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2698[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2699
2700@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2701@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2702Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2703[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2704
2705@cindex DEF files, creating
2706@cindex DLLs, creating
2707@kindex --output-def
2708@item --output-def @var{file}
2709The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2710file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2711(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2712library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2713automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2715
b044cda1 2716@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2717@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2718@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2719@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2720Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2721@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2722By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2723for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2724execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2725[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2726
2727@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2728@item --disable-auto-image-base
2729Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2730user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2731default.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2733
2734@cindex DLLs, linking to
2735@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2736@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2737When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2738search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2739@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2740between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2741uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2742@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2744
2745@kindex --enable-auto-import
2746@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2747Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2748DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2749building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2750'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2751to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2752specification published by Microsoft.
2753
e2a83dd0
NC
2754Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2755data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2756placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2757around a problem with consts that is described here:
2758http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2759
4d8907ac
DS
2760Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2761see this message:
0d888aac 2762
ece2d90e 2763"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2764documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2765
ece2d90e
NC
2766This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2767ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2768allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2769fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2770constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2771multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2772this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2773of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2774the warning, and exit.
2775
2776There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2777data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2778
2fa9fc65
NC
2779One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2780of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2781this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2782
c0065db7
RM
2783A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2784that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2785there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2786a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2787
2788@example
2789extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2790extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2791 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2792@end example
2793
2794or
2795
2796@example
2797extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2798extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2799 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2800@end example
2801
c0065db7 2802For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2803is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2804
2805@example
2806extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2807extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2808 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2809@end example
2810
c406afaf
NC
2811or
2812
2813@example
2814extern long long extern_ll;
2815extern_ll -->
2816 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2817@end example
2818
2fa9fc65 2819A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2820'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2821@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2822requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2823building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2824merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2825between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2826constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2827
2828Original:
2829@example
2830--foo.h
2831extern int arr[];
2832--foo.c
2833#include "foo.h"
2834void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2835 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2836@}
2837@end example
2838
2839Solution 1:
2840@example
2841--foo.h
2842extern int arr[];
2843--foo.c
2844#include "foo.h"
2845void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2846 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2847 volatile int *parr = arr;
2848 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2849@}
2850@end example
2851
2852Solution 2:
2853@example
2854--foo.h
2855/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2856#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2857 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2858#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2859#else
2860#define FOO_IMPORT
2861#endif
2862extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2863--foo.c
2864#include "foo.h"
2865void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2866 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2867@}
2868@end example
2869
c0065db7 2870A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2871library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2872for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2873functions).
bb10df36 2874[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2875
2876@kindex --disable-auto-import
2877@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2878Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2879@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2880[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2881
2fa9fc65
NC
2882@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2883@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2884If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2885that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2886a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2887environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2888[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2889
2890@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2891@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2892Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2893DLLs.
bb10df36 2894[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2895
b044cda1
CW
2896@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2897@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2898Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2899[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2900
252b5132
RH
2901@kindex --section-alignment
2902@item --section-alignment
2903Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2904addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2905[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2906
2907@cindex stack size
2908@kindex --stack
2909@item --stack @var{reserve}
2910@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2911Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2912to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2913committed.
bb10df36 2914[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2915
2916@kindex --subsystem
2917@item --subsystem @var{which}
2918@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2919@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2920Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2921legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2922@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2923the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2924@var{which}.
bb10df36 2925[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2926
2f563b51
DK
2927The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2928of the PE file header:
2929[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2930
2d5c3743
NC
2931@kindex --high-entropy-va
2932@item --high-entropy-va
2933Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2934(ASLR).
2935
2f563b51
DK
2936@kindex --dynamicbase
2937@item --dynamicbase
2938The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2939randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2940Vista for i386 PE targets.
2941
2942@kindex --forceinteg
2943@item --forceinteg
2944Code integrity checks are enforced.
2945
2946@kindex --nxcompat
2947@item --nxcompat
2948The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2949This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2950
2951@kindex --no-isolation
2952@item --no-isolation
2953Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2954
2955@kindex --no-seh
2956@item --no-seh
2957The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2958this image.
2959
2960@kindex --no-bind
2961@item --no-bind
2962Do not bind this image.
2963
2964@kindex --wdmdriver
2965@item --wdmdriver
2966The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2967
2f563b51
DK
2968@kindex --tsaware
2969@item --tsaware
2970The image is Terminal Server aware.
2971
0cb112f7
CF
2972@kindex --insert-timestamp
2973@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2974@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2975Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2976as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2977other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2978will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2979same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2980can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2981that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2982identically.
252b5132
RH
2983@end table
2984
0285c67d
NC
2985@c man end
2986
ac145307
BS
2987@ifset C6X
2988@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2989
2990@c man begin OPTIONS
2991
2992The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2993libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2994all executables use an index of 0.
2995
2996@table @gcctabopt
2997
2998@kindex --dsbt-size
2999@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3000This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3001or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3002entries.
3003
3004@kindex --dsbt-index
3005@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3006This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3007to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3008executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3009@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3010
fbd9ad90
PB
3011@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3012The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3013exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3014
ac145307
BS
3015@end table
3016
3017@c man end
3018@end ifset
3019
93fd0973
SC
3020@ifset M68HC11
3021@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3022
3023@c man begin OPTIONS
3024
3025The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3026memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3027
3028@table @gcctabopt
3029
3030@kindex --no-trampoline
3031@item --no-trampoline
3032This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3033is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3034instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3035
3036@kindex --bank-window
3037@item --bank-window @var{name}
3038This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3039the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3040The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3041paging and addresses within the memory window.
3042
3043@end table
3044
3045@c man end
3046@end ifset
3047
7fb9f789
NC
3048@ifset M68K
3049@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3050
3051@c man begin OPTIONS
3052
3053The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3054when linking for 68K targets.
3055
3056@table @gcctabopt
3057
3058@kindex --got
3059@item --got=@var{type}
3060This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3061@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3062@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3063Info entry for @file{ld}.
3064
3065@end table
3066
3067@c man end
3068@end ifset
3069
833794fc
MR
3070@ifset MIPS
3071@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3072
3073@c man begin OPTIONS
3074
3075The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3076generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3077linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3078
3079@table @gcctabopt
3080
3081@kindex --insn32
3082@item --insn32
3083@kindex --no-insn32
3084@itemx --no-insn32
3085These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3086generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3087or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
308832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3089used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3090possible.
3091
8b10b0b3
MR
3092@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3093@item --ignore-branch-isa
3094@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3095@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3096These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3097transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3098accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3099is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3100instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3101equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3102calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3103a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3104an error.
3105
833794fc
MR
3106@end table
3107
3108@c man end
3109@end ifset
3110
252b5132
RH
3111@ifset UsesEnvVars
3112@node Environment
3113@section Environment Variables
3114
0285c67d
NC
3115@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3116
560e09e9 3117You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3118@ifclear SingleFormat
3119@code{GNUTARGET},
3120@end ifclear
3121@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3122
36f63dca 3123@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3124@kindex GNUTARGET
3125@cindex default input format
3126@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3127use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3128of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3129@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3130of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3131attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3132this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3133there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3134object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3135BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3136in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3137@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3138
3139@kindex LDEMULATION
3140@cindex default emulation
3141@cindex emulation, default
3142@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3143@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3144behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3145available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3146the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3147variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3148linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3149
3150@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3151@cindex demangling, default
3152Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3153@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3154default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3155a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3156may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3157options.
3158
0285c67d
NC
3159@c man end
3160@end ifset
3161
252b5132
RH
3162@node Scripts
3163@chapter Linker Scripts
3164
3165@cindex scripts
3166@cindex linker scripts
3167@cindex command files
3168Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3169written in the linker command language.
3170
3171The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3172the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3173the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3174more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3175direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3176described below.
3177
3178The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3179yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3180linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3181to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3182such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3183
3184You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3185line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3186default linker script.
3187
3188You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3189to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3190Linker Scripts}.
3191
3192@menu
3193* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3194* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3195* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3196* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3197* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3198* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3199* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3200* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3201* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3202* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3203* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3204@end menu
3205
3206@node Basic Script Concepts
3207@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3208@cindex linker script concepts
3209We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3210describe the linker script language.
3211
3212The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3213file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3214@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3215The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3216purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3217among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3218section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3219in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3220
3221Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3222also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3223contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3224the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3225A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3226area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3227loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3228which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3229of debugging information.
3230
3231Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3232first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3233the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3234@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3235section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3236same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3237is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3238(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3239based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3240RAM address would be the VMA.
3241
3242You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3243program with the @samp{-h} option.
3244
3245Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3246@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3247has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3248information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3249will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3250static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3251referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3252
3253You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3254program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3255option.
3256
3257@node Script Format
3258@section Linker Script Format
3259@cindex linker script format
3260Linker scripts are text files.
3261
3262You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3263either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3264symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3265generally ignored.
3266
3267Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3268If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3269otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3270double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3271file name.
3272
3273You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3274@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3275to whitespace.
3276
3277@node Simple Example
3278@section Simple Linker Script Example
3279@cindex linker script example
3280@cindex example of linker script
3281Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3282
3283The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3284@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3285memory layout of the output file.
3286
3287The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3288describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3289code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3290@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3291Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3292your input files.
3293
3294For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32950x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3296linker script which will do that:
3297@smallexample
3298SECTIONS
3299@{
3300 . = 0x10000;
3301 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3302 . = 0x8000000;
3303 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3304 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3305@}
3306@end smallexample
3307
3308You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3309followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3310descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3311
252b5132
RH
3312The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3313sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3314counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3315other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3316current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3317incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3318@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3319
3320The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3321required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3322after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3323which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3324wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3325means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3326
3327Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3328@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3329@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3330
3331The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3332the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3333at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3334output section, the value of the location counter will be
3335@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3336effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3337immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3338
3339The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3340alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3341example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3342sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3343may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3344sections.
3345
3346That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3347
3348@node Simple Commands
3349@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3350@cindex linker script simple commands
3351In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3352
3353@menu
3354* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3355* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3356@ifclear SingleFormat
3357* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3358@end ifclear
3359
4a93e180 3360* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3361* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3362@end menu
3363
3364@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3365@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3366@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3367@cindex start of execution
3368@cindex first instruction
3369@cindex entry point
3370The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3371point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3372entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3373@smallexample
3374ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3375@end smallexample
3376
3377There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3378entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3379stopping when one of them succeeds:
3380@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3381@item
252b5132 3382the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3383@item
252b5132 3384the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3385@item
3ab904c4
NC
3386the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3387targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3388check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3389@item
252b5132 3390the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3391@item
252b5132
RH
3392The address @code{0}.
3393@end itemize
3394
3395@node File Commands
36f63dca 3396@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3397@cindex linker script file commands
3398Several linker script commands deal with files.
3399
3400@table @code
3401@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3402@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3403@cindex including a linker script
3404Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3405be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3406with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
340710 levels deep.
3408
4006703d
NS
3409You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3410@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3411
252b5132
RH
3412@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3413@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3414@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3415@cindex input files in linker scripts
3416@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3417@cindex linker script input object files
3418The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3419in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3420
3421For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3422a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3423then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3424
3425In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3426script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3427
e3f2db7f
AO
3428In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3429with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3430located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3431for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3432open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3433linker will search through the archive library search path.
3434The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3435as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3436path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3437@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3438
ff5dcc92 3439If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3440name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3441@samp{-l}.
3442
3443When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3444files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3445script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3446
3447@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3448@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3449@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3450@cindex grouping input files
3451The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3452files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3453new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3454in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3455
b717d30e
JJ
3456@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3457@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3458@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3459This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3460commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3461as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3462with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3463when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3464@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3465and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3466setting afterwards.
3467
252b5132
RH
3468@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3469@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3470@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3471The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3472@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3473@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3474Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3475precedence.
3476
3477You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3478output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3479
3480@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3481@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3482@cindex library search path in linker script
3483@cindex archive search path in linker script
3484@cindex search path in linker script
3485The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3486@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3487@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3488on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3489are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3490the command line option are searched first.
3491
3492@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3493@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3494@cindex first input file
3495The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3496that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3497though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3498when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3499first file.
3500@end table
3501
3502@ifclear SingleFormat
3503@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3504@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3505A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3506
3507@table @code
3508@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3509@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3510@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3511@cindex output file format in linker script
3512The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3513output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3514exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3515(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3516line option takes precedence.
3517
3518You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3519formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3520This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3521desired endianness.
3522
3523If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3524will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3525output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3526used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3527
3528For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3529command:
3530@smallexample
3531OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3532@end smallexample
3533This says that the default format for the output file is
3534@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3535option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3536format.
3537
3538@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3539@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3540@cindex input file format in linker script
3541The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3542files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3543This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3544(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3545is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3546command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3547@end table
3548@end ifclear
3549
4a93e180
NC
3550@node REGION_ALIAS
3551@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3552@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3553@cindex region alias
3554@cindex region names
3555
3556Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3557@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3558
3559@smallexample
3560REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3564memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3565to memory regions. An example follows.
3566
3567Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3568memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3569that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3570non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3571access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3572read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3573sections:
3574
3575@itemize @bullet
3576@item
3577@code{.text} program code;
3578@item
3579@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3580@item
3581@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3582@item
3583@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3584@end itemize
3585
3586The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3587part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3588output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3589systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3590@code{C}:
3591@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3592@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3593@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3594@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3595@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3596@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3597@end multitable
3598The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3599loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3600the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3601the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3602
3603The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3604includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3605memory layout:
3606@smallexample
3607INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3608
3609SECTIONS
3610 @{
3611 .text :
3612 @{
3613 *(.text)
3614 @} > REGION_TEXT
3615 .rodata :
3616 @{
3617 *(.rodata)
3618 rodata_end = .;
3619 @} > REGION_RODATA
3620 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3621 @{
3622 data_start = .;
3623 *(.data)
3624 @} > REGION_DATA
3625 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3626 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3627 .bss :
3628 @{
3629 *(.bss)
3630 @} > REGION_BSS
3631 @}
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3635regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3636variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3637@table @code
3638@item A
3639Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3640@smallexample
3641MEMORY
3642 @{
3643 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3644 @}
3645
3646REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3647REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3648REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3649REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3650@end smallexample
3651@item B
3652Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3653into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3654@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3655@smallexample
3656MEMORY
3657 @{
3658 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3659 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3660 @}
3661
3662REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3663REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3664REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3665REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3666@end smallexample
3667@item C
3668Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3669@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3670initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3671system start into the @code{RAM}.
3672@smallexample
3673MEMORY
3674 @{
3675 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3676 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3677 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3678 @}
3679
3680REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3681REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3682REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3683REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3684@end smallexample
3685@end table
3686
3687It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3688@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3689necessary:
3690@smallexample
3691#include <string.h>
3692
3693extern char data_start [];
3694extern char data_size [];
3695extern char data_load_start [];
3696
3697void copy_data(void)
3698@{
3699 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3700 @{
3701 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3702 @}
3703@}
3704@end smallexample
3705
252b5132 3706@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3707@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3708There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3709
3710@table @code
3711@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3712@kindex ASSERT
3713@cindex assertion in linker script
3714Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3715with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3716
fd1c4238
NC
3717Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3718take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3719inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3720for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3721symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3722
3723@smallexample
3724 .stack :
3725 @{
3726 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3727 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3728 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3729 @}
3730@end smallexample
3731
3732will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3733PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3734can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3735
3736@smallexample
3737 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3738 .stack :
3739 @{
3740 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3741 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3742 @}
3743@end smallexample
3744
3745will work.
3746
252b5132
RH
3747@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3748@kindex EXTERN
3749@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3750Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3751symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3752modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3753each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3754command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3755
3756@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3757@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3758@cindex common allocation in linker script
3759This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3760to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3761output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3762
4818e05f
AM
3763@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3764@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3765@cindex common allocation in linker script
3766This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3767command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3768to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3769
7bdf4127
AB
3770@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3771@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3772@cindex group allocation in linker script
3773@cindex section groups
3774@cindex COMDAT
3775This command has the same effect as the
3776@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3777@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3778and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3779specified (@samp{-r}).
3780
53d25da6
AM
3781@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3782@kindex INSERT
3783@cindex insert user script into default script
3784This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3785augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3786inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3787@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3788default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3789sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3790linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3791insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3792linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3793default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3794of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3795to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3796is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3797
3798@smallexample
3799SECTIONS
3800@{
3801 OVERLAY :
3802 @{
3803 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3804 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3805 @}
3806@}
3807INSERT AFTER .text;
3808@end smallexample
3809
252b5132
RH
3810@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3811@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3812@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3813This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3814references among certain output sections.
3815
3816In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3817using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3818will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3819errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3820a function defined in the other section.
3821
3822The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3823@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3824an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3825@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3826names.
3827
cdf96953
MF
3828@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3829@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3830@cindex cross references
3831This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3832references to one section from a list of other sections.
3833
3834The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3835output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3836a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3837there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3838must never call back.
3839
3840The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3841The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3842If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3843the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3844status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3845names, not input section names.
3846
252b5132
RH
3847@ifclear SingleFormat
3848@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3849@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3850@cindex machine architecture
3851@cindex architecture
3852Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3853of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3854architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3855the @samp{-f} option.
3856@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3857
3858@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3859@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3860This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3861@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3862in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3863@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3864@end table
3865
3866@node Assignments
3867@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3868@cindex assignment in scripts
3869@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3870@cindex variables, defining
3871You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3872the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3873
3874@menu
3875* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3876* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3877* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3878* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3879* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3880@end menu
3881
3882@node Simple Assignments
3883@subsection Simple Assignments
3884
3885You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3886
3887@table @code
3888@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3889@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3890@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3891@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3892@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3893@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3894@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3895@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3896@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3897@end table
3898
3899The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3900@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3901defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3902
3903The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3904may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3905
3906The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3907
3908Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3909
3910You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3911statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3912section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3913
3914The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3915expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3916
3917Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3918assignments may be used:
3919
3920@smallexample
3921floating_point = 0;
3922SECTIONS
3923@{
3924 .text :
3925 @{
3926 *(.text)
3927 _etext = .;
3928 @}
156e34dd 3929 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3930 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3931@}
3932@end smallexample
3933@noindent
3934In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3935zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3936the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3937defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3938upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3939
eb8476a6
MR
3940@node HIDDEN
3941@subsection HIDDEN
3942@cindex HIDDEN
3943For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3944exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3945
3946Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3947@code{HIDDEN}:
3948
3949@smallexample
3950HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3951SECTIONS
3952@{
3953 .text :
3954 @{
3955 *(.text)
3956 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3957 @}
3958 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3959 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3960@}
3961@end smallexample
3962@noindent
3963In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3964
252b5132
RH
3965@node PROVIDE
3966@subsection PROVIDE
3967@cindex PROVIDE
3968In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3969only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3970the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3971@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3972@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3973@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3974@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3975@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3976
3977Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3978@smallexample
3979SECTIONS
3980@{
3981 .text :
3982 @{
3983 *(.text)
3984 _etext = .;
3985 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3986 @}
3987@}
3988@end smallexample
3989
3990In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3991underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3992the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3993underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3994If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3995linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3996
7af8e998
L
3997@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3998@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3999@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4000Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4001hidden and won't be exported.
4002
73ae6183
NC
4003@node Source Code Reference
4004@subsection Source Code Reference
4005
4006Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4007intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4008a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4009symbol that does not have a value.
4010
4011Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4012transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4013stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4014prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4015mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4016of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4017variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4018linker script variable might be referred to as:
4019
4020@smallexample
4021 extern int foo;
4022@end smallexample
4023
4024But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4025
4026@smallexample
4027 _foo = 1000;
4028@end smallexample
4029
4030In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4031transformation has taken place.
4032
4033When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4034things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4035in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4036second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4037table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4038contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4039value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4040
4041@smallexample
4042 int foo = 1000;
4043@end smallexample
4044
10bf6894 4045creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4046holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4047number 1000 is initially stored.
4048
4049When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4050first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4051memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4052So:
4053
4054@smallexample
4055 foo = 1;
4056@end smallexample
4057
4058looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4059associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4060address. Whereas:
4061
4062@smallexample
4063 int * a = & foo;
4064@end smallexample
4065
10bf6894 4066looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4067and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4068the variable @samp{a}.
4069
4070Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4071the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4072an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4073
4074@smallexample
4075 foo = 1000;
4076@end smallexample
4077
4078creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4079the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4080address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4081linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4082access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4083
4084Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4085you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4086use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4087section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4088linker script contains these declarations:
4089
4090@smallexample
4091@group
4092 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4093 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4094 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4095@end group
4096@end smallexample
4097
4098Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4099
4100@smallexample
4101@group
4102 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4103
73ae6183
NC
4104 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4105@end group
4106@end smallexample
4107
4108Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4109Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4110arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4111
4112@smallexample
4113@group
4114 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4115
4116 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4117@end group
4118@end smallexample
4119
4120Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4121operators.
73ae6183 4122
252b5132 4123@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4124@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4125@kindex SECTIONS
4126The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4127into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4128
4129The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4130@smallexample
4131SECTIONS
4132@{
4133 @var{sections-command}
4134 @var{sections-command}
4135 @dots{}
4136@}
4137@end smallexample
4138
4139Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4140
4141@itemize @bullet
4142@item
4143an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4144@item
4145a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4146@item
4147an output section description
4148@item
4149an overlay description
4150@end itemize
4151
4152The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4153@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4154those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4155understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4156the layout of the output file.
4157
4158Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4159below.
4160
4161If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4162linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4163section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4164input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4165example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4166in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4167
4168@menu
4169* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4170* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4171* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4172* Input Section:: Input section description
4173* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4174* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4175* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4176* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4177* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4178@end menu
4179
4180@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4181@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4182The full description of an output section looks like this:
4183@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4184@group
7e7d5768 4185@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4186 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4187 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4188 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4189 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4190 @{
4191 @var{output-section-command}
4192 @var{output-section-command}
4193 @dots{}
abc9061b 4194 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4195@end group
4196@end smallexample
4197
4198Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4199
4200The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4201name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4202The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4203the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4204The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4205
4206Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4207
4208@itemize @bullet
4209@item
4210a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4211@item
4212an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4213@item
4214data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4215@item
4216a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4217@end itemize
4218
4219@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4220@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4221@cindex name, section
4222@cindex section name
4223The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4224meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4225support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4226must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4227example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4228output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4229names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4230quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4231characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4232commas must be quoted.
4233
4234The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4235Discarding}.
4236
4237@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4238@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4239@cindex address, section
4240@cindex section address
4241The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4242address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4243is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4244
4245If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4246section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4247to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4248alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4249contained within the output section.
4250
4251The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4252
4253@itemize @bullet
4254@item
4255If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4256is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4257in that region.
4258
4259@item
4260If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4261regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4262section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4263be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4264
4265@item
4266If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4267the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4268counter.
4269@end itemize
4270
4271@noindent
4272For example:
4273
252b5132
RH
4274@smallexample
4275.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4276@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4277
252b5132
RH
4278@noindent
4279and
ea5cae92 4280
252b5132
RH
4281@smallexample
4282.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4283@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4284
252b5132
RH
4285@noindent
4286are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4287@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4288counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4289counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4290input sections.
252b5132
RH
4291
4292The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4293For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4294so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4295do something like this:
4296@smallexample
4297.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4298@end smallexample
4299@noindent
4300This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4301aligned upward to the specified value.
4302
4303Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4304location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4305sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4306
4307@node Input Section
36f63dca 4308@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4309@cindex input sections
4310@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4311The most common output section command is an input section description.
4312
4313The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4314You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4315in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4316map the input files into your memory layout.
4317
4318@menu
4319* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4320* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4321* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4322* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4323* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4324@end menu
4325
4326@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4327@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4328@cindex input section basics
4329An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4330by a list of section names in parentheses.
4331
4332The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4333describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4334
4335The most common input section description is to include all input
4336sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4337include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4338@smallexample
4339*(.text)
4340@end smallexample
4341@noindent
18625d54 4342Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4343@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4344of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4345match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4346example:
252b5132 4347@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4348EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4349@end smallexample
4350@noindent
4351will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4352and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4353placed inside the section list, for example:
4354@smallexample
b4346c09 4355*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4356@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4357@noindent
4358The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4359two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4360more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4361
4362There are two ways to include more than one section:
4363@smallexample
4364*(.text .rdata)
4365*(.text) *(.rdata)
4366@end smallexample
4367@noindent
4368The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4369@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4370first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4371they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4372@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4373@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4374
8f1732fc
AB
4375When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4376is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4377immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4378@smallexample
4379*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4380@end smallexample
4381@noindent
4382will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4383@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4384from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4385exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4386could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4387@smallexample
4388*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4389@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4390@noindent
4391Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4392before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4393all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4394@smallexample
4395EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4396@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4397
252b5132
RH
4398You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4399You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4400needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4401@smallexample
4402data.o(.data)
4403@end smallexample
4404
ae17ab41
CM
4405To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4406of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4407
4408Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4409
4410@smallexample
4411@group
4412SECTIONS @{
4413 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4414 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4415@}
4416@end group
4417@end smallexample
4418
4419In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4420input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4421@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4422@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4423whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4424
967928e9
AM
4425You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4426matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4427with no whitespace around the colon.
4428
4429@table @samp
4430@item archive:file
4431matches file within archive
4432@item archive:
4433matches the whole archive
4434@item :file
4435matches file but not one in an archive
4436@end table
4437
4438Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4439wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4440single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4441@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4442within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4443also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4444other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4445from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4446command.
4447
252b5132
RH
4448If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4449the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4450commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4451@smallexample
4452data.o
4453@end smallexample
4454
967928e9
AM
4455When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4456and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4457characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4458name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4459did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4460though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4461@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4462the archive search path.
4463
4464@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4465@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4466@cindex input section wildcards
4467@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4468@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4469@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4470In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4471name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4472
4473The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4474pattern for the file name.
4475
4476The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4477
4478@table @samp
4479@item *
4480matches any number of characters
4481@item ?
4482matches any single character
4483@item [@var{chars}]
4484matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4485character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4486@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4487@item \
4488quotes the following character
4489@end table
4490
4491When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4492will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4493Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4494exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4495@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4496a @samp{/} character.
4497
4498File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4499specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4500does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4501
4502If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4503appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4504will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4505sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4506@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4507@smallexample
4508.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4509.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4510@end smallexample
4511
bcaa7b3e 4512@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4513Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4514in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4515this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4516pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4517@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4518into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4519
bcaa7b3e
L
4520@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4521@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4522difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4523descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4524Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4525reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4526
02ecc8e9
L
4527@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4528@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4529difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4530ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4531encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4532
bcaa7b3e
L
4533@cindex SORT
4534@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4535
4536When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4537can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4538
4539@enumerate
4540@item
4541@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4542It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4543sections have the same name.
4544@item
4545@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4546It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4547sections have the same alignment.
4548@item
c0065db7 4549@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4550treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4551@item
4552@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4553is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4554@item
4555All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4556@end enumerate
4557
4558When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4559section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4560takes precedence over the command line option.
4561
4562If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4563command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4564treated as nested sorting command.
4565
4566@enumerate
4567@item
4568@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4569@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4570@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4571@item
4572@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4573@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4574@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4575@end enumerate
4576
4577If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4578command line option will be ignored.
4579
eda680f8
L
4580@cindex SORT_NONE
4581@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4582section sorting option.
4583
252b5132
RH
4584If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4585@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4586precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4587
4588This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4589files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4590sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4591The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4592with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4593linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4594@smallexample
4595@group
4596SECTIONS @{
4597 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4598 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4599 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4600 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4601@}
4602@end group
4603@end smallexample
4604
4605@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4606@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4607@cindex common symbol placement
4608@cindex uninitialized data placement
4609A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4610file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4611linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4612named @samp{COMMON}.
4613
4614You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4615other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4616particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4617input files are placed in another section.
4618
4619In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4620@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4621@smallexample
4622.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4623@end smallexample
4624
4625@cindex scommon section
4626@cindex small common symbols
4627Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4628example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4629symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4630different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4631the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4632symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4633to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4634locations.
4635
4636@cindex [COMMON]
4637You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4638notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4639@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4640
4641@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4642@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4643@cindex KEEP
4644@cindex garbage collection
4645When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4646it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4647This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4648with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4649@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4650
4651@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4652@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4653The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4654to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4655start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4656@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4657follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4658@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4659@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4660All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4661files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4662
4663@smallexample
4664@group
4665SECTIONS @{
4666 outputa 0x10000 :
4667 @{
4668 all.o
4669 foo.o (.input1)
4670 @}
36f63dca
NC
4671@end group
4672@group
252b5132
RH
4673 outputb :
4674 @{
4675 foo.o (.input2)
4676 foo1.o (.input1)
4677 @}
36f63dca
NC
4678@end group
4679@group
252b5132
RH
4680 outputc :
4681 @{
4682 *(.input1)
4683 *(.input2)
4684 @}
4685@}
4686@end group
a1ab1d2a 4687@end smallexample
252b5132 4688
cbd0eecf
L
4689If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4690and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4691automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4692__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4693indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4694respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4695C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4696
252b5132 4697@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4698@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4699@cindex data
4700@cindex section data
4701@cindex output section data
4702@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4703@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4704@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4705@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4706@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4707You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4708@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4709an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4710parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4711value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4712counter.
4713
4714The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4715store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4716bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4717stored.
4718
4719For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4720of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4721@smallexample
4722BYTE(1)
4723LONG(addr)
4724@end smallexample
4725
4726When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4727same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4728target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4729@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4730@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4731
4732If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4733which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4734When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4735true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4736endianness of the first input object file.
4737
36f63dca 4738Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4739between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4740@smallexample
4741SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4742@end smallexample
4743whereas this will work:
4744@smallexample
4745SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4746@end smallexample
4747
252b5132
RH
4748@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4749@cindex holes, filling
4750@cindex unspecified memory
4751You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4752current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4753otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4754gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4755with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4756necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4757point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4758than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4759different parts of an output section.
4760
4761This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4762value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4763@smallexample
563e308f 4764FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4765@end smallexample
4766
4767The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4768section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4769part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4770entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4771precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4772expression.
252b5132
RH
4773
4774@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4775@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4776There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4777commands.
4778
4779@table @code
4780@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4781@cindex input filename symbols
4782@cindex filename symbols
4783@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4784The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4785The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4786file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4787the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4788
4789This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4790normally used for any other object file format.
4791
4792@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4793@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4794@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4795@item CONSTRUCTORS
4796When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4797unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4798destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4799arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4800automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4801For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4802linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4803@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4804ignored for other object file formats.
4805
4806The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4807constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4808Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4809the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4810first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4811of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4812compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4813formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4814@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4815the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4816destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4817@code{exit}.
4818
4819For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4820arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4821addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4822and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4823linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4824runtime code expects to see.
4825
4826@smallexample
4827 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4828 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4829 *(.ctors)
4830 LONG(0)
4831 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4832 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4833 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4834 *(.dtors)
4835 LONG(0)
4836 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4837@end smallexample
4838
4839If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4840which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4841are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4842are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4843command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4844@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4845@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4846@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4847
4848Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4849and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4850need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4851scripts.
4852
4853@end table
4854
4855@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4856@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4857@cindex discarding sections
4858@cindex sections, discarding
4859@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4860The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4861This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4862may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4863@smallexample
49c13adb 4864.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4865@end smallexample
4866@noindent
4867will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4868@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4869sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4870space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4871too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4872space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4873@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4874@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4875This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4876
a0976ea4 4877The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4878on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4879symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4880the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4881section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4882
4883@cindex /DISCARD/
4884The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4885input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4886section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4887
4888@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4889@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4890@cindex output section attributes
4891We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4892like this:
0c71d759 4893
252b5132 4894@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4895@group
7e7d5768 4896@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4897 [AT(@var{lma})]
4898 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4899 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4900 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4901 @{
4902 @var{output-section-command}
4903 @var{output-section-command}
4904 @dots{}
562d3460 4905 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4906@end group
4907@end smallexample
0c71d759 4908
252b5132
RH
4909We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4910@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4911remaining section attributes.
4912
a1ab1d2a 4913@menu
252b5132
RH
4914* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4915* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4916* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4917* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4918* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4919* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4920* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4921* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4922@end menu
4923
4924@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4925@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4926Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4927parentheses. The following types are defined:
4928
4929@table @code
4930@item NOLOAD
4931The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4932loaded into memory when the program is run.
4933@item DSECT
4934@itemx COPY
4935@itemx INFO
4936@itemx OVERLAY
4937These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4938rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4939marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4940section when the program is run.
4941@end table
4942
4943@kindex NOLOAD
4944@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4945@cindex loading, preventing
4946The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4947the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4948the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4949@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4950need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4951@smallexample
4952@group
4953SECTIONS @{
4954 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4955 @dots{}
4956@}
4957@end group
4958@end smallexample
4959
4960@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4961@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4962@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4963@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4964@cindex load address
4965@cindex section load address
4966Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4967@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4968@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4969specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4970address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4971
ea5cae92
NC
4972The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4973specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4974takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4975load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4976region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4977
4978If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4979section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4980load address:
4981
4982@itemize @bullet
4983@item
4984If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4985the LMA address as well.
4986
4987@item
4988If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4989
4990@item
4991Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4992with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4993section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4994VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4995the last section in the located region.
4996
4997@item
4998If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4999that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5000
5001@item
5002If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5003section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5004@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5005
5006@cindex ROM initialized data
5007@cindex initialized data in ROM
5008This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5009example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5010called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5011@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5012even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5013uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5014defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5015counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5016
5017@smallexample
5018@group
5019SECTIONS
5020 @{
5021 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5022 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5023 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5024 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5025 .bss 0x3000 :
5026 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5027@}
5028@end group
5029@end smallexample
5030
5031The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5032this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5033the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5034how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5035script.
5036
5037@smallexample
5038@group
5039extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5040char *src = &_etext;
5041char *dst = &_data;
5042
ea5cae92
NC
5043/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5044while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5045 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5046
ea5cae92 5047/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5048for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5049 *dst = 0;
5050@end group
5051@end smallexample
5052
bbf115d3
L
5053@node Forced Output Alignment
5054@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5055@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5056@cindex forcing output section alignment
5057@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5058You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5059alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5060intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5061
7e7d5768
AM
5062@node Forced Input Alignment
5063@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5064@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5065@cindex forcing input section alignment
5066@cindex input section alignment
5067You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5068SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5069sections, whether larger or smaller.
5070
0c71d759
NC
5071@node Output Section Constraint
5072@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5073@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5074@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5075@cindex constraints on output sections
5076You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5077of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5078read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5079@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5080
252b5132 5081@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5082@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5083@kindex >@var{region}
5084@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5085@cindex memory regions and sections
5086You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5087using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5088
5089Here is a simple example:
5090@smallexample
5091@group
5092MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5093SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5094@end group
5095@end smallexample
5096
5097@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5098@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5099@kindex :@var{phdr}
5100@cindex section, assigning to program header
5101@cindex program headers and sections
5102You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5103using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5104one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5105assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5106@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5107linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5108
5109Here is a simple example:
5110@smallexample
5111@group
5112PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5113SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5114@end group
5115@end smallexample
5116
5117@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5118@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5119@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5120@cindex section fill pattern
5121@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5122You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5123@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5124(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5125within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5126alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5127necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5128of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5129an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5130fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5131other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5132pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5133expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5134
5135You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5136output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5137
5138Here is a simple example:
5139@smallexample
5140@group
563e308f 5141SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5142@end group
5143@end smallexample
5144
5145@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5146@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5147@kindex OVERLAY
5148@cindex overlays
5149An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5150are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5151the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5152copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5153required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5154can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5155than another.
5156
5157Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5158@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5159output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5160command is as follows:
5161@smallexample
5162@group
5163OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5164 @{
5165 @var{secname1}
5166 @{
5167 @var{output-section-command}
5168 @var{output-section-command}
5169 @dots{}
5170 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5171 @var{secname2}
5172 @{
5173 @var{output-section-command}
5174 @var{output-section-command}
5175 @dots{}
5176 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5177 @dots{}
abc9061b 5178 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5179@end group
5180@end smallexample
5181
5182Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5183section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5184section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5185those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5186except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5187sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5188
abc9061b
CC
5189The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5190the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5191
252b5132
RH
5192The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5193addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5194memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5195whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5196and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5197and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5198
56dd11f0
NC
5199If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5200references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5201the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5202sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5203@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5204
5205For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5206provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5207defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5208@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5209the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5210within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5211symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5212
5213At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5214the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5215
5216Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5217@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5218@smallexample
5219@group
5220 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5221 @{
5222 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5223 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5224 @}
5225@end group
5226@end smallexample
5227@noindent
5228This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5229address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5230@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5231following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5232@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5233@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5234
5235C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5236like the following.
5237
5238@smallexample
5239@group
5240 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5241 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5242 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5243@end group
5244@end smallexample
5245
5246Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5247everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5248example could have been written identically as follows.
5249
5250@smallexample
5251@group
5252 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5253 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5254 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5255 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5256 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5257 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5258 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5259@end group
5260@end smallexample
5261
5262@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5263@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5264@kindex MEMORY
5265@cindex memory regions
5266@cindex regions of memory
5267@cindex allocating memory
5268@cindex discontinuous memory
5269The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5270memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5271
5272The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5273memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5274may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5275can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5276set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5277regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5278around to fit into the available regions.
5279
127fcdff
AB
5280A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5281however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5282specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5283@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5284@smallexample
5285@group
a1ab1d2a 5286MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5287 @{
5288 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5289 @dots{}
5290 @}
5291@end group
5292@end smallexample
5293
5294The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5295region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5296Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5297with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5298must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5299add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5300command.
252b5132
RH
5301
5302@cindex memory region attributes
5303The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5304whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5305not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5306@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5307section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5308the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5309them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5310
5311The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5312@table @samp
5313@item R
5314Read-only section
5315@item W
5316Read/write section
5317@item X
5318Executable section
5319@item A
5320Allocatable section
5321@item I
5322Initialized section
5323@item L
5324Same as @samp{I}
5325@item !
c09e9a8c 5326Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5327@end table
5328
5329If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5330@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5331attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5332in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5333attributes.
5334
5335@kindex ORIGIN =
5336@kindex o =
5337@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5338The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5339the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5340cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5341abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5342@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5343
5344@kindex LENGTH =
5345@kindex len =
5346@kindex l =
5347The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5348region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5349be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5350@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5351
5352In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5353available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5354and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5355linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5356is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5357or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5358explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5359region.
5360
5361@smallexample
5362@group
a1ab1d2a 5363MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5364 @{
5365 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5366 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5367 @}
5368@end group
5369@end smallexample
5370
5371Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5372specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5373@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5374a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5375output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5376was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5377the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5378output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5379region, the linker will issue an error message.
5380
3ec57632 5381It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5382expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5383@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5384
5385@smallexample
5386@group
c0065db7 5387 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5388@end group
5389@end smallexample
5390
252b5132
RH
5391@node PHDRS
5392@section PHDRS Command
5393@kindex PHDRS
5394@cindex program headers
5395@cindex ELF program headers
5396@cindex program segments
5397@cindex segments, ELF
5398The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5399@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5400loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5401program with the @samp{-p} option.
5402
5403When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5404reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5405program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5406This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5407interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5408
5409The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5410in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5411precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5412the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5413not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5414
5415The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5416generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5417ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5418
5419This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5420@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5421
5422@smallexample
5423@group
5424PHDRS
5425@{
5426 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5427 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5428@}
5429@end group
5430@end smallexample
5431
5432The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5433of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5434header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5435with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5436must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5437is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5438
5439Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5440system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5441specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5442sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5443attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5444Section Phdr}.
5445
5446It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5447merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5448repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5449contain the section.
5450
5451If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5452then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5453not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5454convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5455placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5456default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5457segment at all.
5458
5459@kindex FILEHDR
5460@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5461You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5462the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5463The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5464file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5465include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5466segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5467these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5468
5469The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5470value of the keyword.
5471
5472@table @asis
5473@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5474Indicates an unused program header.
5475
5476@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5477Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5478the file.
5479
5480@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5481Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5482
5483@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5484Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5485found.
5486
5487@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5488Indicates a segment holding note information.
5489
5490@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5491A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5492ABI.
5493
5494@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5495Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5496
1a9ccd70
NC
5497@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5498Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5499
252b5132
RH
5500@item @var{expression}
5501An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5502be used for types not defined above.
5503@end table
5504
5505You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5506in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5507@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5508Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5509output section attribute.
5510
5511The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5512which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5513explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5514an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5515header.
5516
5517Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5518headers used on a native ELF system.
5519
5520@example
5521@group
5522PHDRS
5523@{
5524 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5525 interp PT_INTERP ;
5526 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5527 data PT_LOAD ;
5528 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5529@}
5530
5531SECTIONS
5532@{
5533 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5534 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5535 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5536 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5537 @dots{}
5538 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5539 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5540 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5541 @dots{}
5542@}
5543@end group
5544@end example
5545
5546@node VERSION
5547@section VERSION Command
5548@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5549@cindex symbol versions
5550@cindex version script
5551@cindex versions of symbols
5552The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5553only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5554symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5555a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5556shared library.
5557
5558You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5559you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5560also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5561
5562The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5563@smallexample
5564VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5565@end smallexample
5566
5567The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5568Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5569version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5570version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5571version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5572scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5573library.
5574
5575The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5576examples.
5577
5578@smallexample
5579VERS_1.1 @{
5580 global:
5581 foo1;
5582 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5583 old*;
5584 original*;
5585 new*;
252b5132
RH
5586@};
5587
5588VERS_1.2 @{
5589 foo2;
5590@} VERS_1.1;
5591
5592VERS_2.0 @{
5593 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5594 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5595 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5596 "f(int, double)";
5597 @};
252b5132
RH
5598@} VERS_1.2;
5599@end smallexample
5600
5601This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5602version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5603The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5604a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5605of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5606symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5607is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5608in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5609However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5610name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5611
5612Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5613depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5614to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5615
5616Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5617depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5618and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5619
5620When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5621specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5622unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5623unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5624somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5625wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5626wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5627set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5628ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5629
5630The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5631they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5632could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5633However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5634
0f6bf451 5635Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5636in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5637symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5638won't.
5639
5640@smallexample
7c9c73be 5641@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5642@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5643
252b5132
RH
5644When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5645symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5646requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5647shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5648loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5649linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5650application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5651way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5652all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5653search for each symbol reference.
5654
5655The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5656doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5657that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5658functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5659the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5660required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5661that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5662versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5663the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5664
5665There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5666first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5667source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5668script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5669maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5670@smallexample
5671__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5672@end smallexample
5673@noindent
5674in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5675be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5676The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5677@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5678takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5679
5680The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5681function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5682an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5683version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5684linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5685
5686To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5687source file. Here is an example:
5688
5689@smallexample
5690__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5691__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5692__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5693__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5694@end smallexample
5695
5696In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5697unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5698example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5699@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5700
5701When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5702some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5703this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5704@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5705declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5706you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5707
5708If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5709within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5710(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5711specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5712
cb840a31
L
5713You can also specify the language in the version script:
5714
5715@smallexample
5716VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5717@end smallexample
5718
c0065db7 5719The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5720The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5721demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5722patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5723@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5724
86043bbb
MM
5725Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5726described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5727or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5728the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5729whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5730cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5731might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5732should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5733expect when you upgrade.
5734
252b5132
RH
5735@node Expressions
5736@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5737@cindex expressions
5738@cindex arithmetic
5739The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5740that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5741expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5742host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5743
5744You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5745
5746The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5747expressions.
5748
5749@menu
5750* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5751* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5752* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5753* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5754* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5755* Operators:: Operators
5756* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5757* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5758* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5759@end menu
5760
5761@node Constants
5762@subsection Constants
5763@cindex integer notation
5764@cindex constants in linker scripts
5765All constants are integers.
5766
5767As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5768octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5769hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5770@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5771@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5772value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5773
5774@cindex scaled integers
5775@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5776@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5777@cindex suffixes for integers
5778@cindex integer suffixes
5779In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5780constant by
5781@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5782@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5783@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5784@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5785@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5786@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5787@tex
5788${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5789@end tex
5790@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5791respectively. For example, the following
5792all refer to the same quantity:
5793
252b5132 5794@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5795_fourk_1 = 4K;
5796_fourk_2 = 4096;
5797_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5798_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5799@end smallexample
5800
8a308ae8
NC
5801Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5802conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5803
0c71d759
NC
5804@node Symbolic Constants
5805@subsection Symbolic Constants
5806@cindex symbolic constants
5807@kindex CONSTANT
5808It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5809the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5810
5811@table @code
5812@item MAXPAGESIZE
5813@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5814The target's maximum page size.
5815
5816@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5817@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5818The target's default page size.
5819@end table
5820
5821So for example:
5822
5823@smallexample
9d5777a3 5824 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5825@end smallexample
5826
5827will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5828supported by the target.
5829
252b5132
RH
5830@node Symbols
5831@subsection Symbol Names
5832@cindex symbol names
5833@cindex names
5834@cindex quoted symbol names
5835@kindex "
5836Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5837and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5838Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5839specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5840keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5841@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5842"SECTION" = 9;
5843"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5844@end smallexample
5845
5846Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5847to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5848whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5849
ecca9871
L
5850@node Orphan Sections
5851@subsection Orphan Sections
5852@cindex orphan
5853Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5854are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5855script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5856output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5857in which to place the orphaned input section.
5858
5859If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5860an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5861placed at the end of that output section.
5862
5863If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5864sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5865name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5866orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5867one new output section.
5868
5869If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5870then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5871in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5872linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5873attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5874sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5875support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5876
c005eb9e
AB
5877The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5878(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5879output sections an orphan is placed in.
5880
252b5132
RH
5881@node Location Counter
5882@subsection The Location Counter
5883@kindex .
5884@cindex dot
5885@cindex location counter
5886@cindex current output location
5887The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5888current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5889location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5890within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5891anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5892
5893@cindex holes
5894Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5895moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5896location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5897and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5898doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5899
5900@smallexample
5901SECTIONS
5902@{
5903 output :
5904 @{
5905 file1(.text)
5906 . = . + 1000;
5907 file2(.text)
5908 . += 1000;
5909 file3(.text)
563e308f 5910 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5911@}
5912@end smallexample
5913@noindent
5914In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5915located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5916followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5917@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5918@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5919specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5920
5c6bbab8
NC
5921@cindex dot inside sections
5922Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5923current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5924statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5925absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5926however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5927not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5928
5929@smallexample
5930SECTIONS
5931@{
5932 . = 0x100
5933 .text: @{
5934 *(.text)
5935 . = 0x200
5936 @}
5937 . = 0x500
5938 .data: @{
5939 *(.data)
5940 . += 0x600
5941 @}
5942@}
5943@end smallexample
5944
5945The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5946and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5947the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5948much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5949move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5950and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5951the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5952the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5953
b5666f2f
AM
5954@cindex dot outside sections
5955Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5956output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5957needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5958
5959@smallexample
5960SECTIONS
5961@{
5962 start_of_text = . ;
5963 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5964 end_of_text = . ;
5965
5966 start_of_data = . ;
5967 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5968 end_of_data = . ;
5969@}
5970@end smallexample
5971
5972If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5973not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5974between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5975should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5976blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5977the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5978sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5979statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5980special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5981place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5982as follows:
5983
5984@smallexample
5985SECTIONS
5986@{
5987 start_of_text = . ;
5988 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5989 end_of_text = . ;
5990
5991 start_of_data = . ;
5992 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5993 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5994 end_of_data = . ;
5995@}
5996@end smallexample
5997
5998This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5999@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6000placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6001assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6002a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6003section. So you could write:
6004
6005@smallexample
6006SECTIONS
6007@{
6008 start_of_text = . ;
6009 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6010 end_of_text = . ;
6011
6012 . = . ;
6013 start_of_data = . ;
6014 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6015 end_of_data = . ;
6016@}
6017@end smallexample
6018
6019Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6020@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6021
252b5132
RH
6022@need 2000
6023@node Operators
6024@subsection Operators
6025@cindex operators for arithmetic
6026@cindex arithmetic operators
6027@cindex precedence in expressions
6028The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6029the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6030@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6031@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6032@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6033@smallexample
6034precedence associativity Operators Notes
6035(highest)
60361 left ! - ~ (1)
60372 left * / %
60383 left + -
60394 left >> <<
60405 left == != > < <= >=
60416 left &
60427 left |
60438 left &&
60449 left ||
604510 right ? :
604611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6047(lowest)
6048@end smallexample
6049Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6050(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6051(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6052@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6053@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6054@tex
6055\vskip \baselineskip
6056%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6057\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6058\hrule
6059\halign
6060{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6061height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6062&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6063height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6064\noalign{\hrule}
6065height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6066&highest&&&&&\cr
6067% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6068&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6069&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6070&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6071&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6072&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6073&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6074&7&&left&&|&\cr
6075&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6076&9&&left&&||&\cr
6077&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6078&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6079&lowest&&&&&\cr
6080height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6081\hrule}
6082@end tex
6083@iftex
6084{
6085@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6086@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6087@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6088}
6089@end iftex
6090@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6091
6092@node Evaluation
6093@subsection Evaluation
6094@cindex lazy evaluation
6095@cindex expression evaluation order
6096The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6097an expression when absolutely necessary.
6098
6099The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6100address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6101regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6102as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6103
6104However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6105until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6106other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6107for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6108
6109The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6110assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6111allocation.
6112
6113Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6114@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6115
6116If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6117available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6118following
6119@smallexample
6120@group
6121SECTIONS
6122 @{
a1ab1d2a 6123 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6124 @{ *(.text) @}
6125 @}
6126@end group
6127@end smallexample
6128@noindent
6129will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6130address}.
6131
6132@node Expression Section
6133@subsection The Section of an Expression
6134@cindex expression sections
6135@cindex absolute expressions
6136@cindex relative expressions
6137@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6138@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6139@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6140Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6141relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6142using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6143value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6144symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6145operations.
6146
abf4be64
AM
6147Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6148section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6149address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6150@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6151functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6152One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6153(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6154differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6155versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6156section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6157Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6158absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6159given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6160everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6161
6162In the following simple example,
252b5132 6163
7542af2a
AM
6164@smallexample
6165@group
6166SECTIONS
6167 @{
6168 . = 0x100;
6169 __executable_start = 0x100;
6170 .data :
6171 @{
6172 . = 0x10;
6173 __data_start = 0x10;
6174 *(.data)
6175 @}
6176 @dots{}
6177 @}
6178@end group
6179@end smallexample
252b5132 6180
7542af2a
AM
6181both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6182address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6183@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6184section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6185
5c3049d2
AM
6186For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6187addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6188
6189@itemize @bullet
6190@item
c05f749e
AM
6191Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6192operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6193absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6194@item
7542af2a
AM
6195Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6196relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6197and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6198@item
c05f749e
AM
6199Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6200in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6201address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6202before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6203@end itemize
6204
6205The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6206
6207@itemize @bullet
6208@item
6209An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6210@item
6211The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6212@item
9bc8bb33 6213The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6214relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6215(after above conversions) is also a number when
6216@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6217but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6218@item
6219The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6220relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6221section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6222@item
6223The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6224conversions) is an absolute address.
6225@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6226
6227You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6228to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6229create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6230section @samp{.data}:
6231@smallexample
6232SECTIONS
6233 @{
6234 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6235 @}
6236@end smallexample
6237@noindent
6238If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6239@samp{.data} section.
6240
7542af2a
AM
6241Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6242particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6243
252b5132
RH
6244@node Builtin Functions
6245@subsection Builtin Functions
6246@cindex functions in expressions
6247The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6248use in linker script expressions.
6249
6250@table @code
6251@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6252@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6253@cindex expression, absolute
6254Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6255of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6256value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6257normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6258
6259@item ADDR(@var{section})
6260@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6261@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6262Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6263script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6264the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6265@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6266@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6267the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6268@smallexample
6269@group
6270SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6271 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6272 @{
252b5132
RH
6273 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6274 @dots{}
6275 @}
6276 .output :
6277 @{
6278 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6279 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6280 @}
6281@dots{} @}
6282@end group
6283@end smallexample
6284
876f4090
NS
6285@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6286@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6287@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6288@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6289@cindex round up location counter
6290@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6291@cindex round up expression
6292@cindex align expression
6293Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6294to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6295doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6296arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6297expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6298equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6299
6300Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6301next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6302variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6303input sections:
252b5132
RH
6304@smallexample
6305@group
6306SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6307 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6308 *(.data)
6309 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6310 @}
6311@dots{} @}
6312@end group
6313@end smallexample
6314@noindent
6315The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6316a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6317a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6318of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6319
6320The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6321
362c1d1a
NS
6322@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6323@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6324@cindex section alignment
6325Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6326been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6327evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6328the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6329value in that section.
6330@smallexample
6331@group
6332SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6333 .output @{
6334 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6335 @dots{}
6336 @}
6337@dots{} @}
6338@end group
6339@end smallexample
6340
252b5132
RH
6341@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6342@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6343This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6344scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6345section.
6346
2d20f7bf
JJ
6347@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6348@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6349This is equivalent to either
6350@smallexample
6351(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6352@end smallexample
6353or
6354@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6355(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6356 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6357@end smallexample
6358@noindent
6359depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6360for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6361@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6362If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6363memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6364bytes in the on-disk file.
6365
6366This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6367any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6368@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6369be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6370running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6371that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6372page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6373
6374@noindent
6375Example:
6376@smallexample
6377 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6378@end smallexample
6379
6380@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6381@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6382This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6383evaluation purposes.
6384
6385@smallexample
6386 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6387@end smallexample
6388
a4f5ad88
JJ
6389@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6390@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6391This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6392@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6393When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6394does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6395@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6396argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6397script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6398@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6399padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6400section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6401
6402@smallexample
6403 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6404@end smallexample
6405
252b5132
RH
6406@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6407@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6408@cindex symbol defaults
6409Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6410defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6411return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6412default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6413shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6414the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6415existed, its value is preserved:
6416
6417@smallexample
6418@group
6419SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6420 .text : @{
6421 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6422 @dots{}
6423 @}
6424 @dots{}
6425@}
6426@end group
6427@end smallexample
6428
3ec57632
NC
6429@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6430@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6431Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6432
252b5132
RH
6433@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6434@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6435@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6436Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6437Section LMA}).
6438
2e53f7d6
NC
6439@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6440@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6441Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6442@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6443
252b5132
RH
6444@kindex MAX
6445@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6446Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6447
6448@kindex MIN
6449@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6450Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6451
6452@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6453@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6454@cindex unallocated address, next
6455Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6456This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6457use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6458output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6459
3ec57632
NC
6460@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6461@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6462Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6463
ba916c8a
MM
6464@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6465@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6466Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6467value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6468@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6469will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6470can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6471``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6472name.
6473
252b5132
RH
6474@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6475@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6476@cindex section size
6477Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6478been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6479evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6480@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6481@smallexample
6482@group
6483SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6484 .output @{
6485 .start = . ;
6486 @dots{}
6487 .end = . ;
6488 @}
6489 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6490 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6491@dots{} @}
6492@end group
6493@end smallexample
6494
6495@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6496@itemx sizeof_headers
6497@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6498@cindex header size
6499Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6500information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6501this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6502choose, to facilitate paging.
6503
6504@cindex not enough room for program headers
6505@cindex program headers, not enough room
6506When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6507@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6508number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6509addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6510additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6511room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6512the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6513script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6514you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6515command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6516@end table
6517
6518@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6519@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6520@cindex implicit linker scripts
6521If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6522an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6523linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6524linker will report an error.
6525
6526An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6527
6528Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6529assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6530commands.
6531
6532Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6533at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6534read. This can affect archive searching.
6535
6536@ifset GENERIC
6537@node Machine Dependent
6538@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6539
6540@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6541@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6542sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6543functionality are not listed.
6544
6545@menu
36f63dca
NC
6546@ifset H8300
6547* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6548@end ifset
6549@ifset I960
6550* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6551@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6552@ifset M68HC11
6553* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6554@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6555@ifset ARM
6556* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6557@end ifset
6558@ifset HPPA
6559* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6560@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6561@ifset M68K
6562* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6563@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6564@ifset MIPS
6565* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6566@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6567@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6568* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6569@end ifset
2469cfa2 6570@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6571* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6572@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6573@ifset NDS32
6574* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6575@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6576@ifset NIOSII
6577* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6578@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6579@ifset POWERPC
6580* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6581@end ifset
6582@ifset POWERPC64
6583* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6584@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6585@ifset S/390
6586* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6587@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6588@ifset SPU
6589* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6590@end ifset
74459f0e 6591@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6592* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6593@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6594@ifset WIN32
6595* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6596@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6597@ifset XTENSA
6598* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6599@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6600@end menu
6601@end ifset
6602
252b5132
RH
6603@ifset H8300
6604@ifclear GENERIC
6605@raisesections
6606@end ifclear
6607
6608@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6609@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6610
6611@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6612For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6613you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6614
6615@table @emph
6616@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6617@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6618@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6619targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6620program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6621respectively.
6622
6623@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6624@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6625@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6626@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6627sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6628page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6629(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6630@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6631top page of memory).
1502569c 6632
81f5558e
NC
6633@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6634indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6635displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6636the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6637@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6638whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6639range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6640
1502569c 6641@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6642@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6643biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6644which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6645page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6646(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6647@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6648the top page of memory).
6649
6650@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6651@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
665232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6653changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6654(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6655@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6656the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6657@end table
6658
6659@ifclear GENERIC
6660@lowersections
6661@end ifclear
6662@end ifset
6663
36f63dca 6664@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6665@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6666@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6667@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6668@node Renesas
6669@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6670
c2dcd04e
NC
6671@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6672H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6673options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6674@end ifset
6675@end ifclear
6676
6677@ifset I960
6678@ifclear GENERIC
6679@raisesections
6680@end ifclear
6681
6682@node i960
6683@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6684
6685@cindex i960 support
6686
6687You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6688specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6689family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6690incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6691linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6692libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6693search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6694
6695For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6696well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6697paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6698the names
6699
6700@smallexample
6701@group
6702try
6703libtry.a
6704tryca
6705libtryca.a
6706@end group
6707@end smallexample
6708
6709@noindent
6710The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6711two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6712
6713You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6714the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6715use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6716specifies a library.
6717
6718@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6719@cindex relaxing on i960
6720@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6721you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6722@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6723them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6724instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6725instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6726target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6727not itself call any subroutines).
6728
6729@ifclear GENERIC
6730@lowersections
6731@end ifclear
6732@end ifset
6733
6734@ifset ARM
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@raisesections
6737@end ifclear
6738
93fd0973
SC
6739@ifset M68HC11
6740@ifclear GENERIC
6741@raisesections
6742@end ifclear
6743
6744@node M68HC11/68HC12
6745@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6746
6747@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6748
6749@subsection Linker Relaxation
6750
6751For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6752optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6753
6754@table @emph
6755@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6756@item relaxing address modes
6757@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6758targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6759program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6760respectively.
6761
6762@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6763transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6764page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6765
6766@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6767When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6768of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6769addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6770@code{bset} instructions.
6771
6772@end table
6773
6774@subsection Trampoline Generation
6775
6776@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6777@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6778For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6779call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6780will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6781trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6782case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6783point to the function trampoline.
6784
6785@ifclear GENERIC
6786@lowersections
6787@end ifclear
6788@end ifset
6789
36f63dca 6790@node ARM
3674e28a 6791@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6792
6793@cindex ARM interworking support
6794@kindex --support-old-code
6795For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6796between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6797been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6798line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6799libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6800option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6801given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6802which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6803the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6804non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6805
6806@cindex thumb entry point
6807@cindex entry point, thumb
6808@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6809The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6810@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6811But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6812branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6813executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6814
ce11ba6c
KT
6815@cindex PE import table prefixing
6816@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6817The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6818the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6819element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6820import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6821
e489d0ae
PB
6822@cindex BE8
6823@kindex --be8
6824The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6825executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6826objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6827option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6828little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6829
3674e28a
PB
6830@cindex TARGET1
6831@kindex --target1-rel
6832@kindex --target1-abs
6833The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6834@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6835or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6836and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6837
6838@cindex TARGET2
6839@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6840The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6841@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6842meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6843@table @samp
6844@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6845@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6846@item abs
6847@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6848@item got-rel
6849@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6850@end table
6851
319850b4
JB
6852@cindex FIX_V4BX
6853@kindex --fix-v4bx
6854The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6855specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6856interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6857also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6858
6859In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6860linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6861@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6862
6863In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6864relocations are ignored.
6865
845b51d6
PB
6866@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6867@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6868Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6869relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6870
6871@smallexample
6872TST rM, #1
6873MOVEQ PC, rM
6874BX Rn
6875@end smallexample
6876
6877This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6878and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6879condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6880
33bfe774
JB
6881@cindex USE_BLX
6882@kindex --use-blx
6883The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6884BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6885situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6886code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6887each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6888
6889This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6890specify it if you are using that target.
6891
c6dd86c6
JB
6892@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6893@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6894The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6895bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6896instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6897to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6898the support code can read the intended values.
6899
6900The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6901intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6902and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6903intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6904full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6905you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6906
6907If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6908enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6909@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6910mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6911vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6912@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6913
6914If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6915potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6916such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6917first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6918instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6919the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6920are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6921
2de70689
MGD
6922@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6923@kindex --fix-arm1176
6924@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6925The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6926in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6927are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6928unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6929
9d5777a3 6930Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6931Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6932http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6933
a504d23a
LA
6934@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6935@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6936
6937The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6938workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6939the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6940off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6941the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6942core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6943integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6944VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6945
6946The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6947necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6948
6949The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6950@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6951STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6952linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6953@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6954
6955If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6956potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6957such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6958replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6959branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6960then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6961
6962The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6963the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6964
6965The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6966they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6967there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6968occurs.
6969
6970The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6971PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6972large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6973cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6974occurs.
6975
bf21ed78
MS
6976@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6977@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6978The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6979warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6980enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6981linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6982using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6983not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6984
6985@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6986@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6987The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6988warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6989@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6990linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6991using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6992
726150b7
NC
6993@cindex PIC_VENEER
6994@kindex --pic-veneer
6995The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6996ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6997is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6998@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6999
7000@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7001@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7002The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7003code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7004perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7005placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7006controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7007The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7008duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7009group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7010code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7011where they should be placed.
7012
7013The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7014@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7015placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7016branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7017placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7018value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7019exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7020A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7021linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7022from the input sections.
7023
7024The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7025@samp{N = +1}.
7026
1a51c1a4
NC
7027Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7028only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7029otherwise.
7030
1db37fe6
YG
7031@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7032@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7033@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7034The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7035
7036The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7037
68fcca92
JW
7038@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7039@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7040@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7041The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7042
7043Please contact ARM for further details.
7044
1db37fe6
YG
7045@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7046@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7047@cindex Merging exidx entries
7048The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7049
7050@kindex --long-plt
7051@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7052The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7053which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7054entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7055
1f56df9d
JW
7056@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7057@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7058The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7059link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7060
4ba2ef8f
TP
7061@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7062All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7063Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7064@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7065veneers in memory.
7066
54ddd295
TP
7067@kindex --cmse-implib
7068@cindex Secure gateway import library
7069The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7070specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7071secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7072executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7073
0955507f
TP
7074@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7075@cindex Input import library
7076The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7077must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7078given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7079in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7080@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7081library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7082library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7083for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7084specified.
7085
36f63dca
NC
7086@ifclear GENERIC
7087@lowersections
7088@end ifclear
7089@end ifset
7090
7091@ifset HPPA
7092@ifclear GENERIC
7093@raisesections
7094@end ifclear
7095
7096@node HPPA ELF32
7097@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7098@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7099@kindex --multi-subspace
7100When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7101import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7102The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7103stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7104multiple sub-spaces.
7105
7106@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7107@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7108Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7109stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7110@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7111sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7112a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7113the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7114conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7115prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7116A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7117branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7118@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7119@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7120detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7121positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7122
7123Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7124single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7125create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7126large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7127
7128@ifclear GENERIC
7129@lowersections
7130@end ifclear
7131@end ifset
7132
7fb9f789
NC
7133@ifset M68K
7134@ifclear GENERIC
7135@raisesections
7136@end ifclear
7137
7138@node M68K
7139@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7140
7141@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7142@kindex --got=@var{type}
7143The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7144The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7145@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7146the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7147@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7148entries only at non-negative offsets.
7149@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7150entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7151support such GOTs.
7152@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7153output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7154file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7155files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7156
7157@ifclear GENERIC
7158@lowersections
7159@end ifclear
7160@end ifset
7161
833794fc
MR
7162@ifset MIPS
7163@ifclear GENERIC
7164@raisesections
7165@end ifclear
7166
7167@node MIPS
7168@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7169
7170@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7171@kindex --insn32
7172@kindex --no-insn32
7173The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7174microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7175in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7176used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7177or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7178including 16-bit ones where possible.
7179
8b10b0b3
MR
7180@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7181@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7182@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7183The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7184control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7185@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7186relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7187calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7188relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7189instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7190or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7191the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7192
833794fc
MR
7193@ifclear GENERIC
7194@lowersections
7195@end ifclear
7196@end ifset
7197
36f63dca
NC
7198@ifset MMIX
7199@ifclear GENERIC
7200@raisesections
7201@end ifclear
7202
7203@node MMIX
7204@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7205For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7206@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7207understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7208can translate between the two formats.
7209
7210There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7211Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7212registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7213equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7214@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7215global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7216this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7217symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7218
7a2de473
HPN
7219Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7220@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7221The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7222of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7223
7224Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7225are left out from an mmo file.
7226
7227@ifclear GENERIC
7228@lowersections
7229@end ifclear
7230@end ifset
7231
7232@ifset MSP430
7233@ifclear GENERIC
7234@raisesections
7235@end ifclear
7236
7237@node MSP430
7238@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7239For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7240will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7241just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7242
7243@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7244The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7245
7246@table @code
7247@item @samp{.vectors}
7248Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7249
7250@item @samp{.bootloader}
7251Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7252in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7253
7254@item @samp{.infomem}
7255Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7256this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7257
c0065db7 7258@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7259This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7260in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7261
7262@item @samp{.noinit}
7263Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7264
c0065db7 7265The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7266@end table
7267
7ef3addb
JL
7268@table @option
7269@cindex MSP430 Options
7270@kindex --code-region
7271@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7272This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7273argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7274using this option.
7275
7276@kindex --data-region
7277@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7278This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7279[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7280for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7281
7282@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7283@item --disable-sec-transformation
7284Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7285and @code{--data-region} options.
7286This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7287wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7288not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7289@end table
7290
36f63dca
NC
7291@ifclear GENERIC
7292@lowersections
7293@end ifclear
7294@end ifset
7295
35c08157
KLC
7296@ifset NDS32
7297@ifclear GENERIC
7298@raisesections
7299@end ifclear
7300
7301@node NDS32
7302@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7303@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7304For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7305relaxes objects according to these options.
7306
7307@table @code
7308@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7309Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7310
7311@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7312Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7313
7314@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7315Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7316
7317@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7318Export the EX9 table after linking.
7319
7320@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7321Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7322
7323@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7324Update the existing EX9 table.
7325
7326@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7327Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7328
7329@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7330Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7331
7332@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7333Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7334
7335@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7336Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7337@end table
7338
7339@ifclear GENERIC
7340@lowersections
7341@end ifclear
7342@end ifset
7343
78058a5e
SL
7344@ifset NIOSII
7345@ifclear GENERIC
7346@raisesections
7347@end ifclear
7348
7349@node Nios II
7350@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7351@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7352@kindex --relax on Nios II
7353
7354Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7355transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7356which may result in @command{ld} giving
7357@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7358The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7359trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7360outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7361trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7362be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7363larger than 256MB.
7364
7365The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7366is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7367@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7368locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7369source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7370register as a temporary.
7371
7372Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7373relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7374option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7375
7376@ifclear GENERIC
7377@lowersections
7378@end ifclear
7379@end ifset
7380
2a60a7a8
AM
7381@ifset POWERPC
7382@ifclear GENERIC
7383@raisesections
7384@end ifclear
7385
7386@node PowerPC ELF32
7387@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7388@cindex PowerPC long branches
7389@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7390Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7391displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7392@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7393@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7394the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7395section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7396section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7397@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7398both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7399considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7400
7401@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7402@table @option
7403@cindex PowerPC PLT
7404@kindex --bss-plt
7405@item --bss-plt
7406Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7407generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7408the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7409writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7410@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7411PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7412compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7413BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7414
016687f8
AM
7415@kindex --secure-plt
7416@item --secure-plt
7417@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7418@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7419when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7420layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7421style BSS PLT.
7422
2a60a7a8
AM
7423@cindex PowerPC GOT
7424@kindex --sdata-got
7425@item --sdata-got
7426The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7427sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7428@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7429section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7430@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7431@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7432@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7433@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7434PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7435pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7436GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7437really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7438
7439@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7440@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7441@item --emit-stub-syms
7442This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7443symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7444
7445@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7446@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7447@item --no-tls-optimize
7448PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7449sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7450disable the optimization.
7451@end table
7452
7453@ifclear GENERIC
7454@lowersections
7455@end ifclear
7456@end ifset
7457
7458@ifset POWERPC64
7459@ifclear GENERIC
7460@raisesections
7461@end ifclear
7462
7463@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7464@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7465
7466@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7467@table @option
7468@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7469@kindex --stub-group-size
7470@item --stub-group-size
7471Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7472by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7473@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7474sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7475a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7476the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7477conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7478prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7479A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7480branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7481@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7482@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7483detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7484positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7485
7486Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7487single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7488create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7489large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7490
7491@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7492@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7493@item --emit-stub-syms
7494This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7495symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7496
7497@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7498@kindex --dotsyms
7499@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7500@item --dotsyms
7501@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7502These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7503in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7504function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7505code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7506properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7507to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7508@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7509dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7510feature.
7511
7ae4ea7d
AM
7512@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7513@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7514@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7515@item --save-restore-funcs
7516@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7517These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7518provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7519@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7520function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7521link.
7522
2a60a7a8
AM
7523@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7524@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7525@item --no-tls-optimize
7526PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7527sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7528disable the optimization.
7529
7c9cf415
AM
7530@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7531@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7532@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7533@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7534@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7535These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7536stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7537an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7538@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7539stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7540option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7541Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7542slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7543application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7544normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7545
2a60a7a8
AM
7546@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7547@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7548@item --no-opd-optimize
7549PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7550corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7551the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7552Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7553
7554@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7555@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7556@item --non-overlapping-opd
7557Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7558@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7559the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7560entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7561
7562@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7563@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7564@item --no-toc-optimize
7565PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7566entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7567reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7568marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7569marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7570relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7571unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7572reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7573discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7574reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7575code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7576optimization.
7577
7578@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7579@kindex --no-multi-toc
7580@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7581If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7582@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7583where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7584entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7585total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7586grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7587TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7588calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7589help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
759064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7591Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7592
7593@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7594@kindex --no-toc-sort
7595@item --no-toc-sort
7596By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7597happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7598placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7599with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7600referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7601@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7602results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7603off this feature.
7604
7605@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7606@kindex --plt-align
7607@kindex --no-plt-align
7608@item --plt-align
7609@itemx --no-plt-align
7610Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7611aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7612boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7613specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7614specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7615if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7616PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7617
7618@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7619@kindex --plt-static-chain
7620@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7621@item --plt-static-chain
7622@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7623Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7624chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7625chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7626
7627@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7628@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7629@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7630@item --plt-thread-safe
7631@itemx --no-thread-safe
7632With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7633lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7634another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7635order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7636memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7637barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7638looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7639seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7640default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7641
7642@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7643@kindex --plt-localentry
7644@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7645@item --plt-localentry
7646@itemx --no-localentry
7647ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7648ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7649(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7650Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7651or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7652functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7653in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7654interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7655including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7656to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7657complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7658care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7659@end table
7660
7661@ifclear GENERIC
7662@lowersections
7663@end ifclear
7664@end ifset
7665
b4cbbe8f
AK
7666@ifset S/390
7667@ifclear GENERIC
7668@raisesections
7669@end ifclear
7670
7671@node S/390 ELF
7672@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7673
7674@cindex S/390 ELF options
7675@table @option
7676
7677@cindex S/390
7678@kindex --s390-pgste
7679@item --s390-pgste
7680This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7681segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7682binaries marked that way.
7683@end table
7684
7685@ifclear GENERIC
7686@lowersections
7687@end ifclear
7688@end ifset
7689
49fa1e15
AM
7690@ifset SPU
7691@ifclear GENERIC
7692@raisesections
7693@end ifclear
7694
7695@node SPU ELF
7696@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7697
7698@cindex SPU ELF options
7699@table @option
7700
7701@cindex SPU plugins
7702@kindex --plugin
7703@item --plugin
7704This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7705
7706@cindex SPU overlays
7707@kindex --no-overlays
7708@item --no-overlays
7709Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7710regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7711@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7712turns off all this special overlay handling.
7713
7714@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7715@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7716@item --emit-stub-syms
7717This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7718symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7719
7720@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7721@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7722@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7723This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7724function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7725on calls to non-overlay regions.
7726
7727@cindex SPU local store size
7728@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7729@item --local-store=lo:hi
7730@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7731the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7732range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7733
c0065db7 7734@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7735@kindex --stack-analysis
7736@item --stack-analysis
7737SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7738unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7739under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7740@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7741@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7742determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7743for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7744for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7745for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7746find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7747and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7748under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7749dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7750is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7751and calls will be given.
7752
c0065db7 7753@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7754@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7755@item --emit-stack-syms
7756This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7757in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7758These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7759functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7760functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7761such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7762The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7763@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7764@end table
7765
7766@ifclear GENERIC
7767@lowersections
7768@end ifclear
7769@end ifset
7770
36f63dca
NC
7771@ifset TICOFF
7772@ifclear GENERIC
7773@raisesections
7774@end ifclear
7775
7776@node TI COFF
7777@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7778@cindex TI COFF versions
7779@kindex --format=@var{version}
7780The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7781TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7782also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7783format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7784header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7785
7786@ifclear GENERIC
7787@lowersections
7788@end ifclear
7789@end ifset
7790
2ca22b03
NC
7791@ifset WIN32
7792@ifclear GENERIC
7793@raisesections
7794@end ifclear
7795
7796@node WIN32
7797@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7798
c0065db7 7799This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7800See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7801command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7802
7803@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7804@cindex import libraries
7805@item import libraries
69da35b5 7806The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7807libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7808regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7809archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7810support for creating such libraries provided with the
7811@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7812
c0065db7
RM
7813@item exporting DLL symbols
7814@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7815The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7816
7817@table @emph
7818@item using auto-export functionality
7819@cindex using auto-export functionality
7820By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7821which is controlled by the following command line options:
7822
0a5d968e
NC
7823@itemize
7824@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7825@item --exclude-symbols
7826@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7827@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7828@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7829@end itemize
7830
09e2aba4
DK
7831When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7832(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7833symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7834often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7835private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7836options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7837exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7838final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7839
7840If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7841command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7842if either of the following are true:
7843
7844@itemize
7845@item A DEF file is used.
7846@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7847@end itemize
dc8465bf 7848
c0065db7
RM
7849@item using a DEF file
7850@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7851Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7852an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7853exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7854name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7855command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7856
7857@example
7858gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7859@end example
7860
0a5d968e
NC
7861Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7862@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7863
dc8465bf
NC
7864Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7865
7866@example
4b5bd4e7 7867LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7868
7869EXPORTS
7870foo
7871bar
7872_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7873another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7874var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7875doo = foo == foo2
7876eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7877@end example
dc8465bf 7878
7fcab871 7879This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7880symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7881alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7882by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7883@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7884@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7885export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7886in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7887symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7888
6b31ad16
DS
7889The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7890name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7891the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7892
b45619c0
NC
7893When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7894library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7895@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7896executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7897
7898With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7899specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7900non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7901
7902If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7903or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7904filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7905
4b5bd4e7
DS
7906The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7907
7908@example
7909EXPORTS
7910 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7911 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7912 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7913@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7914
7915Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7916@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7917@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7918@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7919Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7920@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7921string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7922
7923The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7924
7925@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7926will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7927by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7928linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7929library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7930
7931@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7932The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7933the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7934@code{*_imp__foo}).
7935
7936@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7937well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7938read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7939variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7940the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7941extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7942application will behave unexpectedly.
7943
7944@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7945it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7946symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7947API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7948the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7949
4b5bd4e7
DS
7950See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7951other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7952
7953@cindex creating a DEF file
7954While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7955with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7956
7957@item Using decorations
7958@cindex Using decorations
7959Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7960itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7961declared as:
7962
7963@example
7964__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7965__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7966@end example
7967
7968All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7969any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7970this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7971the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7972
7973Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7974decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7975instead:
7976
7977@example
7978__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7979__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7980@end example
7981
c0065db7
RM
7982This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7983when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7984variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7985code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7986of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7987omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7988@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7989information.
c0065db7 7990@end table
dc8465bf 7991
2ca22b03
NC
7992@cindex automatic data imports
7993@item automatic data imports
7994The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7995by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7996compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7997issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7998code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7999c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8000initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8001decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8002platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8003command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8004The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8005suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8006trigger the feature's use.
8007
c0065db7 8008auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8009additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8010
c0065db7 8011"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8012documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8013
c0065db7
RM
8014The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8015occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8016One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8017below.
8018
8019@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8020For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8021object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8022offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8023field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8024in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8025without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8026The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8027references.
8028
c0065db7
RM
8029The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8030be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8031themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8032runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8033compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8034support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8035run without error on an older system.
8036
c0065db7
RM
8037@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8038enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8039
8040@cindex direct linking to a dll
8041@item direct linking to a dll
8042The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8043including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8044libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8045traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8046libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8047function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8048though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8049storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8050tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8051large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8052
c0065db7 8053Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8054@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8055of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8056perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8057select the dll instead of an import library.
8058
2ca22b03 8059
69da35b5
NC
8060For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8061to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8062
8063@example
45e948fe
NC
8064libxxx.dll.a
8065xxx.dll.a
8066libxxx.a
8067xxx.lib
69da35b5 8068cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8069libxxx.dll
8070xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8071@end example
8072
69da35b5
NC
8073before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8074
c0065db7
RM
8075(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8076where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8077@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8078file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8079@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8080
c0065db7
RM
8081Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8082@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8083was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8084various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8085could coexist on the same machine.
8086
2ca22b03
NC
8087The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8088applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8089libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8090
8091@example
8092bin/
8093 cygxxx.dll
8094lib/
8095 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8096 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8097@end example
8098
c0065db7
RM
8099Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8100done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8101
81021. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8103@example
8104gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8105@end example
2ca22b03 8106
69da35b5
NC
8107However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8108(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8109@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8110not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8111
2ca22b03
NC
81122. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8113directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8114should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8115making the app/dll.
8116
8117@example
8118ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8119@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8120
8121Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8122
8123@example
8124gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8125@end example
69da35b5
NC
8126
8127This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8128perfectly legal
8129
8130@example
8131bin/
8132 cygxxx-5.dll
8133lib/
c0065db7 8134 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8135@end example
8136
dc8465bf 8137Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8138even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8139@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8140
8141Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8142wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8143
81441. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8145work with auto-imported data.
8146
dc8465bf
NC
81472. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8148import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8149symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8150for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8151possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8152
45e948fe
NC
81533. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8154critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8155in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8156stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8157
69da35b5 8158So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8159true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8160a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8161binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8162massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8163requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8164will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8165
c0065db7 8166@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8167@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8168@item adding additional names
8169Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8170A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8171exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8172when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8173import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8174
c0065db7 8175@example
dc8465bf
NC
8176LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8177
8178EXPORTS
c0065db7 8179foo
dc8465bf 8180_foo = foo
c0065db7 8181@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8182
8183The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8184
8185Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8186source code using the "weak" attribute:
8187
c0065db7
RM
8188@example
8189void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8190void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8191@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8192
8193See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8194symbols.
8195
8196@item renaming symbols
8197Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8198kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8199@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8200DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8201created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8202
c0065db7 8203@example
dc8465bf
NC
8204LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8205
8206EXPORTS
8207_foo = foo
c0065db7 8208@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8209
8210The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8211@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8212@end table
dc8465bf 8213
0a5d968e 8214Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8215unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8216If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8217@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8218that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8219@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8220renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8221to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8222the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8223In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8224which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8225
8226@cindex weak externals
8227@item weak externals
8228The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8229weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8230defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8231are three variants of weak externals:
8232@itemize
8233@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8234called lazy externals.
8235@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8236This form is not presently implemented.
8237@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8238implemented.
8239@end itemize
8240As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8241are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8242uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8243
8244@cindex aligned common symbols
8245@item aligned common symbols
8246As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8247desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8248the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8249carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8250by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8251tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8252but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8253warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8254
2ca22b03
NC
8255@end table
8256
8257@ifclear GENERIC
8258@lowersections
8259@end ifclear
8260@end ifset
8261
e0001a05
NC
8262@ifset XTENSA
8263@ifclear GENERIC
8264@raisesections
8265@end ifclear
8266
8267@node Xtensa
8268@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8269
8270@cindex Xtensa processors
8271The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8272@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8273specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8274keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8275example, with the command:
8276
8277@smallexample
8278SECTIONS
8279@{
8280 .text : @{
8281 *(.literal .text)
8282 @}
8283@}
8284@end smallexample
8285
8286@noindent
8287@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8288and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8289literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8290interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8291group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8292files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8293and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8294
43cd72b9 8295@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8296@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8297Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8298provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8299is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8300literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8301will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8302location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8303the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8304unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8305@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8306range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8307
8308For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8309to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8310instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8311instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8312instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8313@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8314hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8315By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8316switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8317density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8318instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8319performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8320linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8321a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8322
8323The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8324control the linker:
8325
8326@cindex Xtensa options
8327@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8328@item --size-opt
8329When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8330more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8331no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8332alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8333preserve the correctness of the code.
8334@end table
e0001a05
NC
8335
8336@ifclear GENERIC
8337@lowersections
8338@end ifclear
8339@end ifset
8340
252b5132
RH
8341@ifclear SingleFormat
8342@node BFD
8343@chapter BFD
8344
8345@cindex back end
8346@cindex object file management
8347@cindex object formats available
8348@kindex objdump -i
8349The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8350These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8351object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8352format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8353it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8354associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8355object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8356(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8357list all the formats available for your configuration.
8358
8359@cindex BFD requirements
8360@cindex requirements for BFD
8361As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8362several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8363BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8364formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8365been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8366BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8367may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8368
8369One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8370mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8371useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8372conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8373
8374@menu
8375* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8376@end menu
8377
8378@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8379@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8380@cindex opening object files
8381@include bfdsumm.texi
8382@end ifclear
8383
8384@node Reporting Bugs
8385@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8386@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8387@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8388
ff5dcc92 8389Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8390
8391Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8392it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8393to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8394work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8395@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8396
8397In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8398information that enables us to fix the bug.
8399
8400@menu
8401* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8402* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8403@end menu
8404
8405@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8406@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8407@cindex bug criteria
8408
8409If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8410
8411@itemize @bullet
8412@cindex fatal signal
8413@cindex linker crash
8414@cindex crash of linker
8415@item
8416If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8417@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8418
8419@cindex error on valid input
8420@item
ff5dcc92 8421If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8422
8423@cindex invalid input
8424@item
ff5dcc92 8425If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8426may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8427object files are correct.
8428
8429@item
8430If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8431improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8432@end itemize
8433
8434@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8435@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8436@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8437@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8438
8439A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8440products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8441recommend you contact that organization first.
8442
8443You can find contact information for many support companies and
8444individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8445distribution.
8446
ad22bfe8 8447@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8448Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8449@value{BUGURL}.
8450@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8451
8452The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8453@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8454fact or leave it out, state it!
8455
8456Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8457problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8458assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8459matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8460the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8461location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8462were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8463into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8464specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8465and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8466
8467Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8468the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8469on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8470
8471Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8472bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8473respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8474You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8475
8476To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8477
8478@itemize @bullet
8479@item
ff5dcc92 8480The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8481the @samp{--version} argument.
8482
8483Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8484the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8485
8486@item
ff5dcc92 8487Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8488patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8489
8490@item
8491The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8492version number.
8493
8494@item
ff5dcc92 8495What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8496``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8497
8498@item
8499The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8500observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8501list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8502sufficient.
8503
8504If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8505and then we might not encounter the bug.
8506
8507@item
8508A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8509bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8510provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8511bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8512state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8513requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8514we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8515attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8516
8517If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8518@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8519object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8520@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8521how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8522
8523@item
8524A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8525incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8526
ff5dcc92 8527Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8528will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8529not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8530a chance to make a mistake.
8531
8532Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8533say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8534copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8535C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8536and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8537fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8538you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8539any conclusion from our observations.
8540
8541@item
ff5dcc92 8542If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8543diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8544@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8545If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8546context, not by line number.
8547
8548The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8549sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8550@end itemize
8551
8552Here are some things that are not necessary:
8553
8554@itemize @bullet
8555@item
8556A description of the envelope of the bug.
8557
8558Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8559which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8560changes will not affect it.
8561
8562This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8563will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8564with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8565We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8566
8567Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8568of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8569output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8570less time, and so on.
8571
8572However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8573report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8574
8575@item
8576A patch for the bug.
8577
8578A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8579the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8580a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8581to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8582
ff5dcc92 8583Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8584construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8585through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8586able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8587fixed.
8588
8589And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8590patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8591help us to understand.
8592
8593@item
8594A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8595
8596Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8597things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8598@end itemize
8599
8600@node MRI
8601@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8602@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8603To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8604linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8605alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8606described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8607simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8608@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8609linker commands; these commands are described here.
8610
8611In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8612file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8613features to make use of them.
8614
8615You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8616@samp{-c} command-line option.
8617
8618Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8619command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8620blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8621MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8622issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8623
8624Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8625
8626You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8627lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8628The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8629
8630@table @code
8631@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8632@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8633@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8634Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8635the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8636@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8637your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8638script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8639commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8640input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8641@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8642
8643@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8644@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8645Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8646in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8647
8648@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8649
8650@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8651@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8652Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8653@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8654
8655@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8656@item BASE @var{expression}
8657Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8658absolute addresses) in the output file.
8659
8660@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8661@item CHIP @var{expression}
8662@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8663This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8664
8665@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8666@item END
8667This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8668
8669@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8670@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8671Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8672language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8673
8674@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8675@item
252b5132
RH
8676S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8677
8678@item
8679IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8680
8681@item
8682COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8683@samp{COFF}
8684@end enumerate
8685
8686@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8687@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8688Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8689@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8690
8691The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8692same line, with no change in its effect.
8693
8694@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8695@item LOAD @var{filename}
8696@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8697Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8698same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8699command line.
8700
8701@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8702@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8703@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8704MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8705option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8706
8707@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8708@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8709@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8710Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8711order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8712script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8713sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8714file, in the order specified.
8715
8716@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8717@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8718@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8719@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8720Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8721@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8722
8723@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8724@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8725@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8726@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8727You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8728specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8729If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8730@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8731@end table
8732
793c5807
NC
8733@node GNU Free Documentation License
8734@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8735@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8736
370b66a1
CD
8737@node LD Index
8738@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8739
8740@printindex cp
8741
8742@tex
7ca01ed9 8743% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8744% meantime:
8745\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8746\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8747\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8748\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8749\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8750\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8751\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8752\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8753\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8754% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8755@end tex
8756
252b5132 8757@bye
This page took 1.427243 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.